Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870) — OCR (Apple Vision)

Source and licence

share: publicnone

Source: corpus/incoming/e-2/sharpe-canopus-1870/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf, 172 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md

Attribution: Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Sharpe d.1881: PDF Author field "Sharpe, Samuel, 1799-1881, ed. and tr" of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29); title page pdf p. 5 ("… by Samuel Sharpe … London: John Russell Smith … 1870") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume sharpe-canopus-1870)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.

Licence: public domain in Canada (author died ≤ 1971, verified; LICENCES.md §7) — US position (recorded, does not gate the class; PD-CA 2026-09-26): PD-US (published ≤1930)

Jurisdiction note: this text is public domain under Canadian law (the project is published from Canada; LICENCES.md §7: author died in or before 1971). It may still be in copyright elsewhere — in countries with a life + 70 term, or where a later edition claims its own rights. The licence line above says what was verified. If you are outside Canada, check your own law before re-using it.

Full provenance and citation

The text

4,932 lines · a line number is a link to itself

ref	L0 witness (OCR)
p. 1
p. 2
1	Cornell University
2	OUNDED D° Library
3	The original of this book is in
4	the Cornell University Library.
5	There are no known copyright restrictions in
6	the United States on the use of the text.
7	http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026869564
p. 3
8	JAN
9	JAN:
10	Date
11	Due
12	PJ 1531.C2
13	Decree of Canc
14	3 19
15	ell University Library
16	1870
17	pus in hieroglyphics and G
18	24 026 869 564 olin
p. 4
p. 5
19	THE
20	DECREE OF CANOPUS,
21	IN
22	HIEROGLYPHICS AND GREEK,
23	WITH
24	TRANSLATIONS,
25	AND AN EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICAL CHARACTERS.
26	Br SAMUEL SHARPE,
27	AUTHOR OF «TEE HISTORI OF EGTPT."
28	LONDON:
29	JOHN RUSSELL SMITH, 36, SOHO SQUARE.
30	1870.
p. 6
31	-340D49.
32	WORKS BY IHE AUTHOR
33	(CORNELL
34	UN!VERSITY
35	EGYPTIAN HIEROGLYPHIOS, being 'an Nature, Origin, and Meaning ; Pich a FOOADULARY LIBRARY ittempt to Explain their
36	EGYPTIAN INSCRIPTIONS from the British Museum and other
37	sources; 216 Plates, in Folio.
38	The EGYPTIAN ANTIQUITIES in the BRITISH MUSEUM
39	described.
40	The ALABASTER SARCOPHAGUS of Oimenephah I., wilh Plates
41	by JOSEPH BONOMI.
42	The TRIPLE MUMMY-CASE of Aroeri-ao, with Plates by JosEPH
43	BoNOMI.
44	The HISTORY of EGYPT, from the Earliest Times till the Conquest
45	by the Arabs, in A.D. 640. Fourth Edition.
46	The CHRONOLOGY and GEOGRAPHY of ANCIENT EGYPT,
47	with Plates by JOSEPH BoNOMI.
48	ALEXANDRIAN CHRONOLOGY.
49	The CHRONOLOGY of the BIBLE.
50	The HISTORY of the HEBREW NATION and its LITERATURE.
51	The HEBREW SCRIPTURES TRANSLATED, being a revision of
52	the Authorized English Old Testament.
53	The NEW TESTAMENT TRANSLATED from Griesbach's Text.
54	Sixth Edition.
55	CRITICAL NOTES on the Authorized' English Version of the New
56	Testament. Second Edition.
57	HISTORIC NOTES on the Books of the Old and New Testaments.
58	Second Edition.
59	TEXTS from the HOLY BIBLE, explained by the Help of the Ancient
60	Monuments. Second Edition.
61	EGYPTIAN MYTHOLOGY and EGYPTIAN CHRISTIANITY,
62	with their Influence on the Opinions of Modern Christendom.
p. 7
63	THE DECREE OF CANOPUS.
64	INTRODUCTION.
65	THE following Inscription may be called either the Deeree of
66	Canopus, from the city in whieh the Egyptian priests met when
67	they published it, or the Tablet of Tanis, from the spot in whieh
68	it was found, and the city for whieh this copy • was carved. It
69	was found in 1866, by Messrs. Lepsius and Weidenbach, of
70	Berlin, and Messrs. Reiniseh and Roesler, of Vienna; and each
71	party published a copy of it. The following is copied from that
72	published in Vienna by the latter gentlemen. It contaius thirty-
73	seven lines of hieroglyphieal writing, followed by seventy-five
74	lines of Greek—one the translation from the other. Each inserip-
75	tion is continuous, with no breaks or spaces between the words.
76	Above the hieroglyphies is a semieircular pieture of a pair of
77	outstretched wings, but without the Sun, from whieh these wings
78	usually spring. From the place of the Sun hang two Asps-
79	one erowned with the erown of Upper Egypt, and the other with
80	that of Lower Egypt. Between the Asps are the eharacters for a
81	Gift and for Life. On each side of the Asps is a sceptre, in a
82	borizontal position, which the Asps may be supposed to hold.
83	The stone is limestone, and, though not hard, the inseription on
84	it is uninjured. The whole, both of the hieroglyphies and the
85	Greek, is perfeet.
86	It was happily discovered by Dr. Roesler, on publishing this
87	Deeree, that the sadly mutilated fragment of a bilinguar tablet in
88	Burton's "Exeerpta Hieroglyphica," plates 54 and 55, is a eopy
89	of the same Deeree. This stone is now in Paris, in the Louvre.
90	On comparing the very few charaeters that can be read upon it
p. 8
91	IV INTRODUCTION.
92	with our perfect copy, we are able to learn, first, that the two
93	Greek inscriptions probably agreed together word for word, but
94	not line for line; aud secondly, that the two hieroglyphical
95	inscriptions did not agree character for character. Hence, alone,
96	we might have concluded that the Greek was the original, and
97	that the hieroglyphics were the translation. And this is what we
98	have learnt by comparing the Greek and hieroglyphics in the
99	perfect tablet. The Paris copy was originally wider than that
100	found at Tanis, but had been divided down its lengtb, probably
101	in order to make of it two door-steps, or sills, for which, as it is
102	of hard stone, it was very suitable; and in some such position it
103	has been very much worn. It had a more ornamental head-piece.
104	Under the winged Sun are traces of a row of several gods and
105	goddesses, and probably there was once a figure of the king
106	sacrificing to them. Beneath are thirty lines of bieroglyphics, and
107	seventy-three of Greek. The Paris copy has also the remains
108	of a third version of the Decree, in the Enchorial or common
109	letters, not given by Burton.
110	In the following pages the hieroglyphics are divided, with
111	spaces between the words, and every word is numbered, for the
112	convenience of referring to it in the Explanation of the hiero-
113	glyphics which follows. At the same time, the position of the
114	characters is so kept that the reader can understand how they
115	stood with regard to one another in the more crowded original.
116	The Greek is not given in the square characters of the original,
117	but in the letters usually employed in printed books. Both the
118	bieroglyphies and the Greek are divided into their original lines.
119	In the Explanation of the bieroglyphical words, first is given its
120	probable meaning; then the force of its characters in Roman
121	letters; then the Coptie word which those letters seem to represent.
122	When a word, as is usually the case, is used several times in the
123	Inscription, reference is made from one place to another. Reference
124	is also sometimes made to the Author's Vocabulary, at the
125	end of his volume entitled Egyptian Hieroglyphics. The Coptic
126	words quoted are all taken from Dr. Tattam's Lexicon Ægуp-
127	tгаcum.
p. 9
128	INTRODUCTION. V
129	The two translations are placed face to face, and broken into
130	paragraphs for more convenient comparison. An Alphabet is
131	added, but it is limited to the letters used in our Inscription.
132	Both translations are as literal as possible, in order to show not
133	only how far they agree, but also how far they differ.
134	This Deeree would have given to us the long wished-for
135	key to the knowledge of hieroglyphics, had we not already
136	obtained that knowledge by means of the Rosetta Stone, which
137	was discovered more than half a century carlier. The Rosetta
138	Stone, thanks to Dr. Young and M. Champollion, had given us
139	a knowledge of several words, and the force of a large number of
140	letters, or syllabic characters. With this beginning, aided by
141	the art of decyphering, by the Coptic language, and by the
142	pictures which accompany many of the Egyptian inscriptions,
143	this number has been largely increased. The new acquisitions
144	are, many of them, as certain as the knowledge gained more
145	directly from the translated inscription. Other results are of less
146	certain value; and some of these this new discovery will enable
147	us to reject, while it confirnis others with a double certainty.
148	The language of this tablet differs not a little from that of
149	Rosetta. In that inscription, as it would seem, the hieroglyphies
150	were the original, and the Greek a translation. But in this Decree
151	of Canopus the Greek seems to be the original, and the hierogly-
152	phies the translation. The consequence is, that in the hieroglyphics
153	of this Deeree the thoughts are expressed at far greater length—
154	that is, with the help of a far greater number of words—than in
155	the bieroglyphics of the Rosetta Stone. The Egyptian scribe, in
156	his wish to express accurately the meaning of the more exact
157	language, was forced to use a greater number of auxiliary verbs,
158	and of inflections to his verbs, than we meet with on the Rosetta
159	Stone, or is common in other inscriptions. In this way it makes
160	the Coptie language far more necessary to us, and also far more
161	useful. Again, the Egyptian scribe has made use of his priestly
162	knowledge to give the particulars of some of the rites, which are
163	mentioned by the Greek writer in only general terms; and he has
164	given to the king his Egyptian complimentary titles, which are not
p. 10
165	INTRODUCTION.
166	found in the Greek. He shows the various ranks of the priests
167	and priestesses, and the various degrees of holiness of the temples,
168	or parts of the temples. He gives to the sacred bread its name
169	of Presenee-bread, the very name used in the Hebrew law for the
170	bread eaten by the priests in the Temple of Jerusalem. Thus in
171	our translations the hieroglyphie deeree is mueh longer than the
172	Greek. The seribe has been very inexaet in the use of the pre-
173	positions ; but perhaps not more so than the Coptic language
174	allows.
175	If a student should wish to pursue an independent inquiry, and
176	to deeypher the hieroglyphies for himself without the help, and
177	therefore without the possible mistakes, of former inquirers, he
178	should begin with a number of the names of the Egyptian kings.
179	From the most modern of those, the names of the Roman
180	emperors and of the Ptolemies, he may form au alphabet of
181	nearly one hundred characters. The reeurrenee of the same
182	characters in the various names will be a proof that the right force
183	has been assigned to eaeh.
184	He may then begin upon this Deeree, not using the translation
185	here given, but making one for himself. In doing so, the pro-
186	position is to divide the hieroglyphical inseription into various
187	groups of eharaeters for words in such a manner, that the same
188	hieroglyphieal words should correspond as nearly as possible with
189	the same Greek words in the various parts of the Deeree. So
190	far as this can be done, the Greek words may be supposed to
191	be a translation of the eorresponding hieroglyphies. The
192	hieroglyphieal words are then to be compared with the words in
193	the Coptic Dictionary. In this way, when the Greek inseription
194	and hieroglyphie inseription are compared, if a hieroglyphieal
195	word is in every case found to eorrespond in the sentence with the
196	same Greek word, and if also, when read by means of the alphabet,
197	it be found to bear in the Coptie language the meaning whieh its
198	Greek word gives to it, we may then be satisfied that we have
199	learned its real meaning.
200	By this appeal to the Coptie language, the student will not
201	only confirm the alpbabetic foree whieh he gained for the several
p. 11
202	INTRODUCTION. vii
203	characters from the kings' names; but he will add to his alphabet
204	many characters which are not there used. He will also learn the
205	syllabic sound of many characters which, as they contain . the
206	sound of two consonants, can take no place in an alphabet.
207	These are the stepa which the Author bas pursued; but he is
208	well aware that he has not in every place obtained the wished-for
209	certainty. His translation of the single words is in many cases
210	of doubtful value, and, possibly, often wrong. 'This arises from
211	two causes: first, the hieroglyphies are not an exact, but a free
212	rendering of the Greek Decree; and, secondly, the language of the
213	hieroglyphics is not quite the same as the Coptic of the Dietionary,
214	which was the language of Egypt four centuries after this inscrip-
215	tion was niade. If the reader takes the trouble to compare this
216	translation with that made by Dr. Lepsius, or that by Drs.
217	Reinisch and Roesler, be will find that it differs from those in the
218	force given to many of those characters which are less certainly
219	understood, because they are not used in the kings' names. It
220	also differs in its division of the continuous sentence into words,
221	and in the meaning of many of the words. But those gentlemen
222	make no appeal to the Coptic language to support their renderings ;
223	and hence we are unable to judge upon what their opinions are
224	founded.
225	This Decree is valuable to us for other reasons besides its help
226	to the study of hieroglyphies. It tells us of a proposal then
227	made by the priests to reform the Egyptian calendar, at least, so
228	far as it was used in fixing the days when the religious feasts were
229	to be celebrated. Ever since the year B.c. 1322, in the reign of
230	Menophra, probably the king better known as Thothmosis II., the
231	Egyptian civil year had consisted of 365 days; and hence, for
232	want of a leap-year, the new-year's day, and the feasts then cele-
233	brated, were always moving one day earlier every four years. This
234	change, which must in every generation have been noticed, bad
235	now, by the help of the Alexandrian astronomers, been determined
236	with greater exactness. The new-year's day, the Ist of Thoth,
237	which ought to fall on the 18th of July, when the Dog Star is
238	seen to rise heliacally, had now, in the ninth year of Ptolemy
p. 12
239	viii INTRODUCTION
240	Euergetes, moved nearly nine months earlier, and fell on the 22nd
241	of October. This is well known from several observations recorded
242	by the Alexandrian astronomers; and quite agrees—at least, as
243	well as observations which depend upon eyesight and the weather
244	can be expected to agree—with the information contained in tlis
245	Decree, namely, that the Dog Star then rose heliacally on the lst
246	of Payni. Calculating back fron what we are told by Censorinus,
247	our great authority on the Calendar, we should have supposed that
248	was not the case till the next year, the 10th of Euergetes. The
249	very small disagreement shows with what accuracy the heliacal
250	rising of the star could be observed. However, the priests pro-
251	posed to be no longer guided by this movable civil year in the
252	arrangement of their feast days. How far their proposal was
253	acted on we do not know. The change was not made by civil
254	authority till the reign of Augustus, who first introduced the
255	Julian mode of reckoning into Alexandria, in the year B.c. 25.
256	This rather intricate subject will be best understood by the help
257	of the following Table, showing the Egyptian Calendar at the
258	various times at which we have occasion to consider it :-
p. 13
259	THE EGYPTIAN CALENDAR.
260	when Auguitis Iitroduced the Leap-year; B.c. 25.
261	TheCivil Year of 365 days, at the Era of Menophra; B.c. 1322.
262	The Natural Xea) 3657 davs.
263	The Months, with their Names showing the Seasons.
264	25 July 28 Sept. 28 Oct. 27 NoT. 27 Dec. 26 Jan. 25 Feb. 27 March 26 April. 26 May 25 June 25 July
265	19 July 11\| 18 Aug. 17 Sept. - Mesore. 17 Oct. Five days. 22 Oct. New-year's Day. Thoth. 21 Nov. Paophi. 21 Dec. Athyr: 20 Jan. Cbœac. 19 Feb. .Tybi. 21 March Mechir. 20 April Phamenoth. 20 May Pharmuthi, 20 June Pachon. 19 JulyR
266	Thoth, first month. Paophi. Athyr. Choeac. Tybi. Mechir. Phamenoth. Pharmuthi. Pachon. Payni. Epiphi. Mesore. Five days added.
267	The Dog-star rises on the 18th July; the New-year's Day. 17 Aug. 16 Sept. 16 Oct. 15 Nor. of Vegetation. 15 Dec. 14 Jan. 13 Feb. 15 March 14 April Housing. 14 May 13 June 13 July 18 July
268	Pachon, Ist Payni, 2nd Epiphi, 3rd Mesore, 4th Thoth, Ist Paophi, 2nd Athyr, 3rd Choac, 4th Tybi, Ist Mechir, 2nd Phamenoth, 3rd Pharmuthi, Ath
p. 14
269	INTRODUCTION,
270	In the first column of the accompanying Table explaining the
271	Egyptian Calendar, we have the names of the months, together
272	with their hieroglyphical descriptions, as helonging to the several
273	seasons.
274	In the seeond column we have the three seasons of the year, each
275	divided into four months, with the days on which those seasons were
276	supposed by the Egyptians to begin, and also the days on whieh
277	each of the twelve months would always have begun if the
278	Egyptians had known the true length of the year, and had under-
279	stood how to regulate the civil year by the help of intercalary days.
280	The third column shows how, according to Censorinus, the year
281	was arranged at the beginning of the Sothie Period, B.c. 1322,
282	ealled by Theon the Era of Menophra. At that time, perhaps,
283	the five additional days, called the Epagomenæ, were added to the
284	twelve months of thirty days each, under the belief that the year
285	consisted of 365 days, and that the months would for the future
286	remain stationary, each keeping to its own season. It will be
287	observed that the months did not then pietorially represent the
288	seasons in which they fell. Thus Thoth, whieh began on the
289	18th of July, when the inundation began, is pietorially the first
290	month of vegetation. Each of the months, so far as its name was
291	pietorial, was the third part of the year out of place.
292	Of course, with the want of an interealary day on every fourth
293	year, the months did not remain fixed to their seasons; and the
294	fourth column represents the Egyptian Calendar at the date of
295	this Deeree, when the priests proposed to introduee the inter-
296	calary day every fourth year, and to check the wandering of the
297	months for the future. This eolumn is eonfirmed by the words
298	of the Deeree, whieh, in lines 37 and 38 of the Greek, informs us
299	that the month of Payni began with the heliacal rising of the
300	Dog Star, and with the beginning of the Nile's overflow—that is
301	to say, about the 18th of July.
302	The praiseworthy wisb of the priests was, however, not earried
303	into effect. The interealary day was not introduced into the
304	calendar, and the civil New-year's day continued to wander
305	through the seasons. Our fifth column represents the eivil year
p. 15
306	INTRODUCTION
307	in the year B.c. 25, when Augustus enforced the wishes of
308	Julius Cæsar in Alexandria, and introduced the system of inter-
309	calating one day every four years. From that time forward the
310	Alexandrian year ceased to be movable. It began on the 29th
311	of August; while the Egyptian year contiuued to wander round
312	the seasons as before.
313	The last three columns in our Table are again and again
314	confirmed by records of the astronomical observations in the
315	writings of Claudius Ptolemy, and Theon. For the Alex-
316	andrian astronomers, following in the steps of their Baby-
317	lonian brethren, always made use of the movable year of 365
318	days, which was much more certain to be hereafter understood
319	than the new Julian year, which, having been made by the ediet
320	of one emperor, might easily be altered by another.
321	Our Decree is dated the 9th year of Euergetes, or B.c. 238 ;
322	and C. Ptolemy has preserved for us two astronomical records of
323	about that time, which satisfactorily prove when the Egyptian
324	months began, and also when the Macedonian month Apellæus
325	began. In the year B.c. 244, the 5th of Apellæus was the
326	27th of Thoth; or Apellæus began on 23rd of Thoth, our 14th of
327	November. Eight years later, in the year B.c. 236, the 14th of
328	Dius was the 9th of Thoth, and Apellæus, the next month, began
329	on the 26th of Thoth, our 15th of November, The difference of
330	the one day is not easily explained, because of the uncertainty as
331	to the intercalation in the Macedonian year, which need not here
332	be entered upon.
333	The above records also show that in the year B.c. 244, Thoth
334	began on the 23rd of October, and that in the year B.c. 236, it
335	began on the 2lst of October, very exactly confirming our fourth
336	column, where, in the year B.c. 238, the Ist of Thoth is placed
337	on the 22nd of October; and also confirming those words of the
338	Decree, which place the Ist of Payni about the 19th July.
339	If we now, with this knowledge, turn to the date of the Decree,
340	we shall find that the priests, by the month of Tybi, mean, not
341	the Tybi of the civil year then in use, which began on the 19th of
342	February, but the Tybi of the reformed Calendar which they are
p. 16
343	xii INTRODUCTION,
344	thus proposing to introduce. The first line of our Decree makes
345	Tybi begin ten days before Apellæus, that is, in some time in
346	November. It would not be easy to say exactly what day of
347	November the priests would then place the Ist of Tybi, from
348	the uncertainty, as before remarked, in the intercalation of the
349	Macedonian year; but it is clear that they proposed that Tybi
350	should stand very nearly as it does in our third column, when
351	Thoth began with the rising of the Dog Star, as arranged at the
352	Era of Menophra. In the date of the Decree, the month Tybi is
353	clearly not that in our fourth column, the civil year then in use,
354	but that in our third column, the civil year of Menophra,
355	B.c. 1322, and of A.D. 138, when, after the lapse of four times
356	365 years, the Egyptian New-year's day had again returned to its
357	original place in the natural year.
p. 17
358	Plate I. lines 1-3.
359	DECREE OF CANOPUS.
360	EDYEMONKEE
361	SNALEŤR * ÷=
362	-=¿ŁŽM÷IŤ1
363	ŁŸŸÏЮžæD#
364	ain mio
365	Sleamos 37
p. 18
p. 19
p. 20
366	Lines 3,-5. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 2.
367	28, 27 26 - 2 3 21 =23. 21 20
368	0 . 7
369	nim uno
370	17 . 16 .
371	#=#ЁЇ6D0
372	MY. grmaRüe
373	TIZEMM
374	33. 32.
375	1ZÖKÍ
p. 21
376	Plate 3. DECREE OF CANOPUS. lines 6-8.
377	:16. 12.11.10.
378	1218:170:
379	ZATAOÉTSA
380	&vašv #
381	=14°
382	2=ë2º1Ď mi
383	i2drt2mo
384	.28.27.
p. 22
p. 23
p. 24
385	lines 8-11 DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 4.
386	mENÅMäVELZW
387	• 15. 14 \| 12 .11.10
388	+
389	•яT. • 24 • 23
390	214
391	42.40.
392	15EM"
393	• 25.24.
394	*¿:řÎŸэ·Ёm
395	+EÈmšåÄWử‡ПÄ"
p. 25
396	Ç azel
397	8687' $7
398	•·ЦEYÇİŞAP·
399	• 7% •8E •LI•
400	•48 °
401	£* '9z =
402	17t5
403	•1ZAM≤VM
p. 26
p. 27
p. 28
404	lines 1$-18, DECREE OF' CANOPUS. Plate 6.
405	10.18.17.16.15.14.18.1%.11.
406	ộ1
407	ßžËểŚ*#öäÎ
408	10
409	20. =12
410	¡n 188z
411	•ST.
412	• 22. 21 •20.10.18. • 14.13.
413	um l1!
414	37
415	•49.48.47 • 45 \| •42.41.40. 30.38.37
416	DLTO
p. 29
417	Plate 7. DECREE OF CANOPUS. lines 17-19,
418	. 13. 12. 11
419	nO! re 0TEF V1
420	22.21.20,19.
421	iỆẺÏ™šĐ^7Ÿ₺ЙŠ
422	• 10 • 18
423	Môro
424	47.46.45.48.
425	SMNAZEMANÇŞI«
426	.21.20. uni •12. 10.
427	• 34.83. 32 .31. 30 .24.23.
428	8=17Xml
p. 30
p. 31
p. 32
429	lines 19-22. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 8.
430	o1= 1M
431	6
432	1°
433	. 28.27 \| 26 . 25. 24. 23.
434	1 L
435	→l ml um s
436	șiTld 16. 15.14
437	34. • S0 28. 27.
438	"PTESiEE
439	fŞ®Öä®WNЙ€ 41 10.
440	**∞ I
441	• 22.21. • 16 . 13
442	74141 on
p. 33
p. 34
443	Plate 9. DECREE OF CANOPUS. lnes 22-25
444	• 32 .81 • 27. 20.25.
445	om
446	• 42. 41 .40.39.
447	AVitam "=G 21477880723
448	• 24 \| 29
449	*EEIEDZIY®
450	,46
451	"IASCIY
452	31.30. .48. .26. 22.21.
453	. 37.
454	mArA FÉrÅnfå :=ss
p. 35
455	lmes 25-27. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 10.
456	Lif a1fate1f
457	31,30
458	• 46 ,45.14 +43.41- .39
459	ll Tsî
460	n? :
461	=18, - 15 111
462	1 EF & = \|
463	Ž#Äř#·°ä·
p. 36
p. 37
p. 38
464	Plate 11. DECREE OF CANOPUS. hnes 28-30.
465	.10.
466	=11= н 1-928.
467	• 32 • 31 . 30.,28 .24..22.21. • 19..17.16.15.
468	29 27 25
469	44 43 42 ,40 39. .37 96 \| 35 34 • 33
470	i11 MI kГ 10 dwElt
471	41 38
472	=OANE
473	110 "ta.
474	"≥≥ŻäЙŸïrл
475	QaRSnveТs*Йs • 1,9
476	.28.27.26.25.24.23.22.21
477	Immmeri0sE
p. 39
478	lries 30-33. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 12.
479	40.39
480	•161126
481	13. 12 .8.7.
482	18,69 qaelelal 31.
483	.23.22.21
484	38, 37 .36.39.34.33.32.
485	•$3 12 .10.9. 8 .7.6. 2.1.
486	•IVE mMa=:11
487	118.17.
488	AE A BE F *NALA
489	29 . 28.27
490	• IIIE
491	42.
492	#$l2Lo GAAYO
493	16.5.4.
494	DAPan 'on $ 172- 33
495	• 16.15 .
496	•FmL"4T1E ito
p. 40
p. 41
p. 42
497	Plate 13. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Lines 33-36.
498	viteÄWar®ëФälÖt
499	• 37.38.
500	•L/ L·^1·7*4
501	$178 m 134.
502	• 24 .23. 22. 21
503	•37. .35.34 .31 30 .29. 28 27.
504	PETMADA7
505	48.17.46.45. .43 \|42.41.
506	W218 ™"ЛET
507	#SMÄM -ařeILEl»
508	74**0 11'9 iss
509	-
510	"35. 34 •32.31. 30 . 29.
p. 43
511	lines 36,37. DECREE OF CANOPUS. Plate 14.
512	20.10.
513	11 . 10. • 8. 7
514	Aл!
515	•22. 21
516	.36.35. • 32 .28. 27 .26. 25
517	EE
518	.41.40
519	172414F**
p. 44
p. 45
p. 46
520	Plate 15.
521	ALPHABET.
522	6 4 2
523	L hn
524	16 10 1413 11 1D 9 E,A.
525	• ш м
526	10 6 LIM,O ELI 5 4 2
527	9
528	19 14 18 12 11 O,U.
529	...
530	6
531	2
532	~ B,F,V.
533	foreno 2 X 1 KCH,G.
534	4 2
535	ce tad o L,R.
536	DAHIIL
537	10 9 8 M.
p. 47
538	10
539	17
540	ALPHABET.
541	7 6 5 4 3 2 1
542	-_ mm
543	13 12 11 10
544	6 5 4 3 2 1
545	9 7 5 4 3 2
546	15 13 12 11
547	6 5
548	2
549	15 14 18 12 11 10
550	A EC
551	9 2 1
552	100 10 5 1
553	9 n ш ш \| Num
554	Plate 16.
555	P,PH.
556	-S.SH
557	T.TH
558	H.TH.
559	erals.
p. 48
p. 49
560	LINES
561	2
562	3
563	4
564	5
565	7
566	8
567	g
568	10
569	DECREE OF CANOPUS.
570	1-10.]
571	Bаoьlevouros Птолєнаюч тои Птолемаюо кав Apouons,
572	ĐEW» AderdWn, erous evarou, eф' iepews Aтоrrшибоu тou
573	Mooxiavos Aleçaudpou kar Dewu Adelфor кar Aewu
574	Елєруєто», кашфорои Apoшons Філаделфои Менєкратєьая
575	Tns Dorauuovos, unnos Amellarou éBdoun, AryuTTicou dE
576	ТоВі еттакаьбекату.- Упфитна.- Оі архоєрсьs
577	каь профутаь каь оі EL то абUто» єLоторEvомєноь проs точ
578	отольтной тои дєши наь птерофораь кас ієроурашматсь кас
579	oi aldor iEpels oi ouvauTnoauTes єк тwх ката тnи хараи
580	Epo eus Tn TENTTn Tou ArOU, Eu ý ayeTal ta yeveoria тou
581	BaoilEws, каь els тли перттуи каь ськада то auтou unuos,
582	єц й тарєдавєи туо вабьлєьаи пара точ татроs, оuт-
583	ESpEUGaUTES
584	тavтy ту зuєра єn та єn каnTro iєpo tov Euepyeran
585	DECOU ELTay• Emelin Baouleus Птоленаюs Птоленаюо каь
586	Apouvons, Оєwи Абєлфии,
587	каь Вагольога Вереньку, і абелфу аuтоо кас yuun, Đєo
588	Енеруєтаь, бьателоиоь точча каь мезала єшєрустошитєя та
589	ката тпу хорах ієра каї
590	TAS TQUAS TOD DECOU ETTL TAEOU QUÇOUTES, TOU TE ATIOS кас
591	TOU MUnUIOS KaL TOD MOUTOr EUrOyUuON iEpCOr SODOOU TOU EU
592	ти хора туи
593	ETTLUENELAN JLO TADTOS TOLOUUTaL uETa MEyaNnS SaTavnS kat
594	хoрпуlas кас та єğEvEухдєuта єк ins хopas iєрa ayaдuaтa
595	UTTO
596	B
p. 50
597	2
598	11
599	12
600	13
601	14
602	15
603	16
604	17
605	1S
606	19
607	20
608	21
609	DECREE CF CANOPUS. [LINES 11-21.
610	TWU IEpowи €ğoTpaTEuGas i BadUlEUS avEOQOEN ELs AuyuTTou
611	каь атєбшкеи єus та iєра, ÖдEn Éкаoтоr є§ apxns cšnxen,
612	TYU TE
613	хорак єu єupnиn биатетприкєи, проттоменш» Üтєр аuтns проs
614	TOlla ElUn KaL TOUs EU aUTOIS SuvaoTEvouras, KaL TOLS EV
615	тn хара
616	Taow kaL TOIs allOIs TOUs ÚTO Tn aUTor BaGuleLar
617	TAOOOWEVOIS TnU EUVOWIaD TаPEХOUOW, TOU TE ПOTаMOU ПOTE
618	єNЛITEoTEрOr ava-
619	Bаuтоя каь тачтоя точ єт ту хора кататєтятуменоо єтьь
620	т бинвевуукоть, нак сивоночнєним тло усуєшпрємми
621	катафвора»
622	єтть тьсои тои протєров Вевагьлєчкотси, єф wu oUreßn
623	aBpoXlaLs TEpьTTETTOKEnaь Tous Tno XOpay кaTOLкovuras,
624	пробтацтєs кудєно-
625	DUKCOS TOU TE EU TOIS iEPOLS KAL TOU aNTOU TON TNU XOpaU
626	KATOLкOUUTOs TOrra MEU трOvOngEUTEs, oUK oruyas де тOх
627	тробобох ітєр-
628	ISOUTES ÉVERO TNS TOU AUOPOOTIOU OOTnpIaS, EK TE Zupias kaI
629	Фoшькns каь Китрои как єё аллси тлеошшх тоттом бстои
630	мєтатєр.
631	FANEVOL ELS Tny XOOpAN TUNOOU MELÇOUCOU, SIEoQOaU ToUs Tru
632	AryuTTou kaтoькovuras, alavaron euepyeolan kal ins auTor
633	aperns
634	NEryLoTOU ÚпONUnUa катаlEтOUTES TOLS TE vUU oVOLu KOL TOIs
635	ETTEyoVQNEVOIs, aud' iu oi deor SEdwraoL aUTOIs EvoTalouaar
636	T7y Bабileь-
637	au ка бwcоvоw тárl'ayaва таuта Eus тou aE Xpovor --
638	Ayaln Tux?'-Дєбохдаь тоs ката тли хораш ієрешоги таs
639	тe проитархovoas
640	тьnas єn tous iepors Вабілeь Птолєнско нал Вабоьооу
641	Верецьку, Beoьs Euєруєтaьs, ка тoIs youevow auror, Deous
642	Аделфо, как то mpoyovoьs,
p. 51
643	LINES 22-32.] DECHEE OF CANOPUS. 3
644	22 BEOLs ZwTnpOWn, aUÇEW KaL TOUs iEpELS TOUs EU ÉraoTO TWU
645	ката тту хораи ієрои прогопорацеоваь ієреs как та
646	Виєруєто» дєши каь єкурафє.
647	23 одае єн табы то хруматьюмоя как єк то бактило,
648	oйs форооw, проосуколаттсоваь нак ту івриоотти тао
649	Виєруєтш» дєши просатобахот.
650	24 var дe mpos тai vur útapхovoas тeooapol фuлas
651	тлybous тои iєреwи таи єи скаото ієри наь аччпи, й
652	пробокомаовноєтаь тєм-
653	25 тти фили тах Еuєруєтах деши, єте как ouи ту ааеу тохи
654	каь тпу уєнєсь ваболєшя Птоленаьюи тои тох деши Абелфаи
655	oUUBEBnKEU
656	26 уексоваь ту пемтту тоо дьюи, й как поллох ауадши
657	apхTYETON EU TaGь auApoTToIs' els дe тnu фurnи таuтnu
658	каталEхonual тous атто
659	27 TOU TpOTOU ETOUS yEryEUnuEvOUs iEpels kal rous проoкатаyn-
660	OOUENOUS EOS UnDOS MEGApn TOU EU TO EVaTÇ ETEl KaL TOUs
661	TOUTON EKYOVOUS EUS TOU AEL
662	28 XPOVOU. TOUS dE TpOUTAPXOUTaS iEpEIS ÉOS TOU TPOTOU ETOUS
663	ELVAL CSAUTOS EU TAIS AUTOIS QUNAIS, EN AiS MPOTEpOr nOaN,
664	cs бє кас тous
665	29 EKrJODOUS AUTOU aTTO TOU vUU KATAX@pISEolal Els Tas auTas
666	фUras, Eu ais oi TaTEpEs ELoW' auTь dе тwu eьrooь BOUrEUTOU
667	iEpECOU TOU VUU aipOUUEDOOU
668	30 кат єкьаито єк тw прouтархооwи тевоара» филаи, єд
669	CU TEUTE aф' ÉkaoTns burns laußavoural, eLkooь kal TTEUTE
670	TOUS BOUrEUTas
671	31 ÉEpELs EwvaL, MpOsTauBanOMEnOOr eK Tns TeuTTns urns TWU
672	EvEpyETON dEWU allON TEUTE' METEXEWD dE Kal TOUs eK TnS
673	TEUTTYS
674	32 фuлуs тwм Euєуєтo» вEwи тw ауuєwи как тах alrou
675	áTTaVTOr TOU EN TOIs iepOls kaL фurapxor avrns ewvar Kaf' á
676	как єть тои аллои тео-
677	B 2
p. 52
678	4
679	33
680	34
681	35
682	36
683	37
684	38
685	39
686	40
687	41
688	42
689	43
690	DECREE OF CANOPUS. [LINES 33—43.
691	барш» фолох іпархєь каь єтєбу кав' єкаоток иуда ауоuтас
692	EN TOls iepols éopral тo» Evєpyєror Đєwr ката то протєрог
693	упфіона
694	і тє пертту каь і єкату как і перпту єт єькабь, тоь те
695	aNrOIs MEyLoTOLs DEOLS KaT' EnLaUTOU oUUTeNovUTar éoртal как
696	паnyupeis бпротє-
697	NELS, ayEodaL Kаi EnaUтo Tanyuрь ÔnuOTEмy EU TE TOLS
698	iєpols каь каб їдни тли хорах вабіла Птоленан кал
699	Вабольбоу Вереньку,
700	Aeols Evepyeraus, ту прєра, єн й єтьтеялеь то аотрок то туs
701	Iolos, i vouişETar dLa TON iEpoor ypaMMaTOOr vEOu ETOs Ewvai
702	ayETaL dE VUV, EU TÇo
703	єvаTO єтEL, vOUunuIa тou llavu unzos, єu ф каь та мыкра
704	ВооВаотий как та мегала Вооваотьа аустаь ка i ouraywyn
705	теои картшх как й тог
706	тотаног avаßaoьs ушєтаь єаи бє кав очиваьn
707	ETLTONYU TOU aOTpOU METAßAWEW ELS ÉTEpaN nuepar Sia
708	тєббарши єтои, му мєтать.
709	Осоваь тли ташпуори, аля аусовал ту почипица тоо Паииь,
710	EN i KOL EĘ aPXnS MXON EN TO ETEL, KAL GUUTENEW AUTNU ETTI
711	ÝuEpas
712	Пєтє мета отефанпфораs как дuоьw» каь отоибшл как тах
713	алho» тoх проопкоитох отs бе каь дй сораь то кадпкои
714	TOLOL SIa TAUTOS KATa TRU DUU
715	катаотасы то кооног как иу ouиваwиn тas тао дпмотелсх
716	єортшх тох ауоменом єи то хєкношь аусоваь тоте єк ти
717	Аєрєь, тог аотрои
718	METaBANOUTOS uLas nuepan ба тErоарw» єтwх, éтєраs бє
719	TOU DUU AYOMEDCON EN TO DEPEL aYEODOL EU TO XEGUOUI EU TOLS
720	мєта ташта као, кадатєр про-
721	TEpON TE OUMBEBnKEN YENEO daL KáUVI AvEyLVETO, TAS OUUTaÇECOs
722	TOU EULAUTOU MEVOVONS EK TWN TрLaKOGIW каL EEnKOUтa
723	пнєрши как тах ботєрох троs.
p. 53
724	LINES
725	44
726	45
727	46
728	47
729	48
730	49
731	50
732	51
733	52
734	53
735	54
736	41-54.] DECREE OF CANOPUS.
737	чорьовсьтой єтаусоваь течтє пмерсон, ато то иои мьаи
738	пиєраи вортпи то» Елєруєто» деши єпауєовaь біа тєооаро»
739	ETOU ETI TalS TEvTE TaLs
740	ETTArJOUEVaIS TIPO TOU VEOU ETOUS, ÓTTOS áTTAUTES ELdWGIU, бьють
741	то єхлєток протєрок терь тли бшитачии тач сорши как тоо
742	EVLAUTOU, каL O» VOрьБO.
743	мечой терь тти одыь быакооипо тоо почог босордшоваь каь
744	avaтєтiyрwооаь синВєвпкєк бла тох Емєруєто» весои кас
745	єTElÒn тyu eк Barilews Птолемаюо
746	как Baoulioons Верeнькуs, Овши Еvеруєтwи, уєуєшпмеити
747	Оиуатєра как опомаовешаи Вереикли, й кал Вабольога
748	EUDEWS aTTEDELXOn, OUVEßY TaUTnI TAPPEVOR
749	COS AN EfaLDUnS METENDEL ELS TOU dEVaOU KOGMOr ETE
750	сибпрошутах пара та ваболeь тао єк тns хopas
751	TарацьQмєни проs auтo каї' єuauтог iєpєcи,
752	Di MEya TTEUDOS ETTI TO GUMBEßnKOTI EUDENS OUVETENEGAU
753	ŒSINOAUTES TE TO» Baoilea kar Tnu BaGilLoGau ETELoau
754	кадбросаь т7и дEаи мEта тou OLplos єu тo
755	EV KANCOTOO iEpOO, ó OU MODOU EN TOLS TOOTOIS iEpOLS EOTIU,
756	аlла кас йто тou Baoilews как тач ката тту хорах танта»
757	EU TOIS MANLOTA TUNCOMEDOIS ÚTAPXEL
758	KaL i avayoyn Tou iEpor ThOLOU TOU OGELpLOS ELS TOUTO TO
759	İєро» каї єuьаитої ушиєтаь єк тои єк то "Нраклєу ієрои ти
760	єшату как ськабь тог Холах, тои тоо бророг
761	T iEpor TAUTO DUOLaS oUUTENOUUTOU ETTь TOU iдpULEVOU
762	úт auтw» волoи ітєр Éкастои iєрou тач пратах є5
763	анфотєрсх таи мергох тоо бророг•
764	мєта де ташта проs туи єквешои auins порьша как туи тоо
765	TEUdous aToruGw aпEбwкa» MEyaлопрEтs каlкnдемошькоя
766	каватєр єть та Ати
767	кaь Munuiew, ois uer єveGTiy ушucoвar. Дєбохдаь оUuтедEьи
768	ту єк тwм Euєруєтс» веwи yeyєunиєу, Bабільоом, Верешьку.
769	TLUAS aUSLOUS EU ÚTTaGL TOU
p. 54
770	6
771	50
772	56
773	57
774	58
775	59
776	60
777	61
778	62
779	63
780	64
781	65
782	DECREE OF CANOPUS. [LINES 55-65.
783	ката Iw Xopar iєpous как єTEL EIs dEOUs METnYOEn EU TW
784	Tußь lnul, єu фтeр наь і тог "Нх00 дuyатnp єu архи
785	uEтnarager tou BlOu, nu ó mainp ornoas ovo-
786	набєи ітє нEn вабьлEсач отє óрабш аuтo, ак ayovoiu
787	avry ÉopTnu наь перитлоии єu тяєсоош iєpous тои пратси
788	ED TOUTÇ TO MNDE EU ÇE i ATTODEWOLS aVTnS
789	eu apxy eyeunen, ouuTerew kau Baouoon Веренькn ти єк
790	Tov Evepyerw» dEwr eu ůnTaoe Tols ката тnu Xopan iєpols en
791	тo Tußu unue Еортnu кас тE-
792	pUTrovo EIs huEpas TEooapas ano ÉTTaKaLдeKarns, eu y ó
793	TEpUTlOUS KAL i TOU TEuloUs aTOrUoUs eyeunen aUTy TnU
794	aPXnU' OUUTENEGaL Ò aUTnS KaL
795	ієро агална хробоии блаловой єи екаото тох протшч каь
796	бєитєрси ієрш» каь кадьбротаь єк то ауо• і бе профутуs
797	META TOU EUS TO ADUTOU EPXOMEUOOU
798	iEpEWu TpOs Tou oTortoMor TWr dewu dlon eu Tals aykarars,
799	отаv ai eбoдelaь кaь TaunyupEEs тwu rouтor двwи yшшитаь,
800	ÓTTOS ÚTTO TAUTOU ÓPQOUEVOU
801	тиматаь каь пробкошутаь калоииємоо Веренькиs, аvacons
802	тарвєнои єшак бе тти єтьтьвеметни вабілешаи ту єькомь
803	aUTnS dlaфEpOUGaN TNs ETTLTIOELEUnS
804	TAUS EGKOULU TnS unTpOs aUTns, Baouioons Bepevlens, ek
805	отахиан боши, йи анаребои сстаь й аотьбосьль Вабилеьа,
806	Taurns б отьоw оористрои окпттрой
807	татuроєьбєs, і б єьоваті ді дeaь єxew єu тals херош Перь
808	oй kaL i oupa T7s BaGUlELas EOTaL TEpLELAnuUErn, cOSTE KaI
809	Eк Tns diaderews ins Baoilelas бia-
810	оафеюваь то Верецькуs очора ката та єтьопна тns iєpаs
811	урамматькуs каь отаи та Киклаала ауутаь ео та Холах
812	unzь про тou тEретлои тог Oбeuplos, ката-
813	OKEVaGaL TaS TaplEvOUs TWn iEpEwu allo ayalua BepeviKns,
814	avarons TaplErwu, " OUUTENErOVOW ópoLos duoras kal
815	Tảrла та ovUTErOUuEva vo-
p. 55
816	LINES
817	66
818	67
819	68
820	69
821	70
822	71
823	72
824	73
825	74
826	75
827	76
828	36-76.] DECREE OF CANOPUS. 7
829	мьна ту сорту таиту ебешаь де ката таита кас таь adraus
830	TapдEvOьs Taus BourouEvars ourTerEw та vорьa тo вєw,
831	ірпєоваь б ачтти кач і.
832	По той єтілєгоменой ієрекоо пардєном нав тая хрєшаs
833	тарEхонEнси тos feols, перьксциєнсх тас uбьаs Ваoьleьаs
834	тO» дєcоn,! wv] ієрекал поньоuтar
835	єшал как отац ó проcрnоя опороя параоту, анафереш тая
836	iEpas TAplEvOUS oTaxUS Tous TapalnoouEvous To ayaluaTь
837	Tns DEOU, adEW 8' ELs aUTny
838	каб прєрах каь єк та éортas каl типуuрсь тах лостах
839	DEWU TOUS TE ÇÕOUS aUSpaS Kal Tas yuvaLKas, oùs av úuvous
840	оі ієроурарматсs ура.
841	Yautes бсобы ти фбобьбаокалс, йби наь тантьурафа ката-
842	XCpLo OnOETaL ELS Tas iepas BißlOUs" KaL ETELôn TOIs iEpEUOL
843	бьбочтаь аі трофав єк таи
844	ієрши, стаи єтахдшоw єls то тinfos, бьдоодал таu
845	Оuуатрати тох ієреши єк тох ієрох пробобшх, аф' is au
846	nuepas yEncouTaь, Tnu ovuкрюnо oрE-
847	n троф йTO тW BOUNEUTOn iєpWy тOU єu EкGoTO тOD
848	ієрши ката лоуок так ієрши прособши, каь тох бобоменои
849	арток таьs yuuaLçь
850	таи ієрєши єхєш бьо титої каь калєковал Веренькуs артох-
851	Ó 8' ED ÉKAOTO TON iEPON KATEOTNROS ETTUOTATnS KAL ApXIEpEUS
852	как оі тоо ієрои
853	урашиатсs аvаyраатова точто упфьома els oтnany
854	лдьоть и халкуи iєрoьs ураннать кав Анриттьоья каl
855	'ExAnUIKOLs KaL avadE-
856	тшоаи єк тф етьфалотатс тотф тоо те протол ієром кас
857	бєитєрw» кас трьтшм, оттоs оі ката тту хоораи ієре фас-
858	UOUTOL TUUOUTAS TOUS EvEpyETas AEous KOL та тEкvа aUтOu,
859	кадатєр бькаьой єсть.
p. 56
860	8
861	DECREE OF CANOPUS,
862	FROM THE GREEK.
863	[LINES 1-11.
864	I In the reign of Ptolemy the son of Ptolemy and of Arsinoe,
865	the brother-gods, in the ninth year [в.c. 238], under Apollonides
866	2 the son of Moschion the priest of Alexander, and of the brother-
867	gods, and of the gods Euergetæ, and Menecrateia the daughter of
868	3 Philammon the basket-bearer of Arsinoe Philadelphus, ou the
869	seventh day of the month Apellaius, and the seventeenth of Tybi
870	aceording to the Egyptians, a Decree ;
871	4 The chief priests, and prophets, and those who enter the sanctuary
872	for the robing of the gods, and the feather-bearers, and sacred
873	5 scribes, and the other priests who had met together out of the
874	temples throughout the country for the fifth day of Dius, on
875	6 which is kept the birthday of the king, and for the twenty-fifth
876	day of the same month on which he received the kingdom from
877	7 his father, having met in council together ou that day in the
878	temple of the gods Euergeta, which is in Canopus, declared;
879	Whereas King Ptolemy, the son of Ptoleny and Arsinoe the
880	8 brother-gods, and Queen Bcrenice his sister and wife, the gods
881	Euergetæ, continue in many and great things benefiting the
882	9 temples throughout the country; and the bonours of the gods
883	they have yet further increased; and of Apis and Mnevis, and of
884	the other celebrated animals which are in the country they take
885	10 great care, with great cost and ceremonial expenditure ;
886	And the sacred images which had been carried out of the
887	11 country by the Persians, the king having made war, brought
888	safe into Egypt, and gave back to the temples whence each had
p. 57
889	9
890	DECREE OF CANOPUS,
891	FROM THE HLEROGLYPHICS.
892	LINES 1-6.]
893	1 In the year ninth, in the month of Apellaius upon the day seven,
894	of Tybi seventeen according to the Egyptians, in the reign of
895	King Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthah, son of Ptolemy
896	and of Arsinoe brother-gods, when the priest of Alexander deceased
897	2 and of the brother-gods, and of the gods Euergetæ was Apollonides
898	the son of Moschion, and Menecrateia the daughter of Philammon
899	was basket-bearer for Arsinoe loving her brother, on that day, a
900	Writing;
901	The chief priests of the temples, the high-priests, the guardians
902	3 of the temples, the purifiers, those who sing hymns, those who
903	robe the gods, the writers of the sacred books, the other
904	divine prophets, having purified themselves, being assembled
905	together, having come from the two provinces of Upper and Lower
906	Egypt, for the fifth day of Dius, when the anniversary day of his
907	majesty was celebrated, likewise upon the twenty fifth-day of that
908	4 month when his majesty received his great kingdom from his
909	father, baving celebrated religious honours in the temple of the
910	gods Euergetæ, which is in Canopus, declared this Decree ;
911	King Ptolemy living for ever, beloved by Pthah, son of Ptolemy
912	and of Arsinoe the brother-gods, likewise Queen Berenice his sister
913	5 and wife, the gods Euergetæ; he made columns with great
914	expense for all the temples of the country of Egypt, he prepared
915	obelisks, colossal statues, for the gods, with great abundance of
916	things fit, when, behold, he supplied all the other yearly things for
917	the bull Apis and the bull Mnevis, and the animals in the temples,
918	regulating in the cities of Egypt with other great gifts, excellent
919	gifts of revenues;
920	And that he might make re-conquest of the sacred iniages
921	which had been captured by the barbarians of Persia, he made
922	war on behalf of the cities of Egypt with good fortune; his
p. 58
923	10 FROM THE GREEK, [LINES 12-21.
924	12 been at first taken away, and hath kept the country in peace,
925	carrying war on its behalf against many nations, and those who
926	13 have power in them; and to all those in the country, and to all
927	others uuder their dominion, they render justice;
928	14 And once when the Nile rose rather insufficiently, and all those
929	in the country were struck down by what had happened, and
930	15 were considering the calamity that had happened, under some of
931	the former sovereigns, under whom it happened that those who
932	inhabited the country were ruined by the drought, standing
933	16 forward carefully, having forethought in niany things for those
934	in the temples, and the others who inhabit the country,
935	17 and overlooking not a few of the taxes for the welfare of the men,
936	out of Syria, and Phenicia, and Cyprus, and many other places,
937	18 having sent for corn, into the country at great expense, they saved
938	the inhabitants of Egypt,
939	19 leaving immortal beneficence and a very great memory of their
940	virtue, both to those who now are, and to those who shall be here-
941	after; in return for which the gods have given to them a well-
942	20 established kingdom, and will give them all other good things for
943	ever;
944	[may it be] with good fortune.
945	It seemed fit to the priests throughout the country, to increase
p. 59
946	LINES 7-11.] TROM THD HIEROGLYPHICS. 11
947	majesty plundered the fields of other lands, and foreign countries
948	to the conspieuous glory and prosperity of the country; he gave
949	then to the palaces of the temples which had been plundered,
950	7 baving made to spring up good fortune and joy to Egypt with
951	rejoicing and praises; he fought and made war on behalf of the
952	burial-places against the hated ones and the countries of the
953	numerous barbarians, he cut off the heads of the barbarians, and
954	those who govern them, justice he upheld to all the living men
955	and women of the country, and of the other lands of the men and
956	women under his dominiou ;
957	8 When, behold, it came to pass upon a year that the Nile
958	failed on the right day of the season, all the living men and
959	women of the cities, those were struck down by the event, when,
960	behold, the evil fortune that had bappened,
961	Having read of the destruction once upon a time of happiness
962	befallen in the times of former chief sovereigns, under whom it
963	happened by accident that the Nile failed to Egypt in the day of
964	9' the season; and his majesty (may he be praised) and his sister,
965	they fed those who burn incense in the Egyptian temples, and
966	likewise the various cities of Egypt.
967	At the times appointed he remitted numerous taxes on corn, he
968	gave thousands of necessaries and expenses for the good welfare of
969	the men and women each, he brought wheat to Egypt from the
970	10 Syrians of * * * city, from the land of Caphtor [or Phenicia],
971	from the foreign island of Cyprus, which is in * * * the
972	great sea, and great countries; he gave numerous pieces of silver
973	and leek-plants, and spelt-seed for the guod fortune of the living
974	men and women;
975	By a decree from the land of * * * city he gave fame with-
976	out end of his benevolence for ever; likewise they will talk of the
977	revenues among the hereafter men and women; and for these so
978	many things a gift from the gods of the established high office of
979	I1 ruler of Upper and Lower Egypt with children of his own, and
980	poor people, with servants unto times for ever; with good for-
981	tune.
982	And because of such things, the priests belonging to the
p. 60
983	12 FROM THE GREEK. [LINES 22-32.
984	21 the before existing honours in the temples unto King Ptolemy and
985	Queen Bereniee, the gods Euergeta, and to their parents the
986	22 brother-gods, and to their forefathers the gods Soteres ; and that
987	the priests whieh are in each of the temples throughout the
988	country should be further named priests also of the gods Euer-
989	23 getæ; and that there should be written on all their decrees, and
990	that on the rings whieh they wear should be furtber engraved also,
991	the priesthood of the gods Euergeta;
992	24 And that there should be further appointed unto the now existing
993	four tribes, out of the multitude of priests whieh are in each
994	25 temple, a fifth tribe, to be named that of the gods Duergetæ; and
995	whereas with good fortune it also happened that the birth of King
996	26 Ptolemy, the son of the brother-gods, took place on the fifth day
997	of Dins, whieh also has been the origin of much good to all men;
998	'27 that into this tribe should be ehosen those who had been' made
999	priests sinee the first year, and those who should be added until
1000	the month of Mesore in the nintb year, and their deseendants for
1001	28 ever; but that those who had been priests before, until the first
1002	year, should remain likewise in those tribes in whieh they had
1003	29 been before, and also that their deseendants should from the
1004	present time be distributed into the same tribes in which their
1005	fathers were ;
1006	30 And instead of the twenty priestly senators, who are now year
1007	by year chosen out of the hitherto existing four tribes, of whom
1008	five are taken from eaeh tribe, there shall be twenty-five priestly
1009	31 senators, five others being further taken out of the fifth tribe
1010	belonging to the gods Euergetæ; and that those of the fifth tribe
1011	32 belonging to the gods Euergeta shall partake of the holy things,
1012	and of all the otber things in the temples; and that its chief
p. 61
1013	LINES 12~16.] T'ROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 13
1014	country were led further to prepare other expenses for King
1015	Ptolemy living for ever, beloved by Pthah, and Queen Berenice,
1016	the gods Euergetæ, in the temples, and for the brother-gods, their
1017	12 buried parents, likewise for the gods Soteres, who have been laid
1018	aside, and for those the ancestors beyond; and that the priests of
1019	each of all the Egyptian temples, belonging to the cities of Egypt,
1020	hereafter should in addition be named priests of the gods Euer-
1021	getæ. They should add the name of the priestly high offices to
1022	be written, and the further priestly office of chief bailder unto
1023	the gods Euergeta on the signet-ring to be made, and worn upon
1024	the hands;
1025	13 Another tribe of priests shall be appointed in the temples here-
1026	after, to be in addition to the four tribes of old, on that day to be
1027	made into a fifth tribe, for the gods Euergeta. And whereas there
1028	once happened, with good fortune and good fortune, because the
1029	birth of King Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthah, son of
1030	the brother-gods, in the month Dius, upon the fifth day, made on
1031	14 that day our good and great happiness unto all the living men and
1032	women; there shall be enrolled such priests as have been already of
1033	the rank of Soten in the temples, since that first year of his
1034	majesty, and likewise those shall be enrolled, those immediately
1035	guing to be of that rank until the month of Mesore, in the ninth
1036	year, within that tribe; likewise those born of them for ever.
1037	But the priests each, it is decreed, who had been added before the
1038	15 first jear of old into the appointed tribes into which they had been
1039	added in like manner as before, and those born after that time,
1040	shall be further kept among the scribes of the tribes which were
1041	of their fathers, among those which had been made.
1042	Instead of the twenty priestly senators chosen yearly by the
1043	year out of the four existing tribes, consisting of five scribes, which
1044	16 are from within each tribe, there shall be twenty-five priestly
1045	senators; five scribes in addition being divided off from the fifth
1046	tribe belonging to the gods Euergetæ. And there shall be given
1047	to the appointed fifth scribe belonging to the gods Euergetæ, from
1048	all those things hitherto made, the purifications in the temple and
p. 62
1049	14 FROM THD GREEK. [LINES 33-12.
1050	33 shall be so in respect to those things in which he is over the other
1051	four tribes ;
1052	And whereas in every month the festivals of the gods Euergetæ
1053	are celebrated in the temples according to the former decree (the
1054	34 fifth, the ninth, and the twenty-fifth), and festivals and assemblies
1055	at the national expense are performed every year to the other great
1056	35 gods, there shall be held every year an assembly at the national
1057	expense in the temples and throughout the whole country to King
1058	36 Ptolemy and Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetæ, on the day in
1059	which the star of Isis rises heliacally, which is considered by the
1060	holy scribes to be the new year.
1061	37 This is kept now in this ninth year on the new moon day of the
1062	month of Payni, in which month are kept the little festival of
1063	38 Bubastis, and the great festival of Bubastis, and the gathering of
1064	the fruits, and the rising of the river takes place. But if it
1065	should happen that the heliacal rising of the star passes on to an-
1066	39 other day, because of the four years, the assembly shall not so pass
1067	on, but be kept on the new moon day of Payni, on which day it
1068	40 was kept from the beginning in the year, and it shall be celebrated
1069	during five days with the carrying of crowns, and sacrifices, and
1070	libations, and the other things that are fit;
1071	41 So that the seasons also may do what is fit in every way ac-
1072	cording to the present arrangement of the world, and that it may
1073	not happen that some of the national festivals, which are held in
1074	the winter, should be sometimes held in the summer, in conse-
1075	42 quence of the star moving one day in four years, and that others
p. 63
1076	LINES 17-21.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 15
1077	all other things done in the sanctuaries of the country; and the
1078	chief of that tribe, the royal high-priest, shall be remembered like
1079	as when included in the established four tribes.
1080	17 Whereas there was ordered to be kept an assenibly unto the
1081	gods Euergetæ in the temples, which has been celebrated every
1082	month, upon the fifth day, upon the ninth day, and upon the
1083	twenty-fifth day, according to the writing made at first, there was
1084	added, and there was celebrated an assenibly unto the great gods ;
1085	and a festival throughout the country suitably in every year; there
1086	shall be celebrated a conspicuous suitable festival unto King
1087	18 Ptolemy, living for ever, beloved by Pthab, and Queen Berenice,
1088	the gods Euergetæ, throughout the two regions in every city of
1089	Egypt at the time when the day of the star of Isis shining is
1090	placed, which is named the new-year's day by the scribes of
1091	heavenly life.
1092	It is celebrated in this niuth year in the month of Payni, with
1093	holding an assembly of the new-ycar's day unto Pasht, and a
1094	festival unto Pasht in that month, * * * because of which
1095	the season for the religious ceremonies of all the fruits and the
1096	19 overflowing of the Nile is celebrated. Behold a decree is
1097	made; behold if it should happen by accident that the changing
1098	of the festival of the star of Isis shall be placed a day further,
1099	because of the fourth year, by nothing shall the religious cere-
1100	mony of that day be kept at a later time; that assembly shall
1101	be celebrated conspicuously, being begun upon the month of
1102	Payni, the first day, as the celebration of the assembly was
1103	20 kept by us in this ninth year. That assembly shall be cele-
1104	brated during five days with persons bringing diadems, with
1105	corn, with otber sacrifices on the altar, the like doings, and all
1106	other things shall he celebrated which were made at a former
1107	time conspicuously ;
1108	Behold if it is done, the seasons shall be in respect of every
1109	21 thing like the former decree which was about the heavens, and
1110	that day of the Dog-star shall not have a turning about, that it
1111	shall happen to come to pass at any time, by the decree that the
1112	assemblies should be made to change in the country, that those
p. 64
1113	16 FROM THE GREEK. [LINES 43-52.
1114	of those now held in the summer, should be held in the winter in
1115	43 the future seasons, as had formerly happened to come to pass,
1116	from the arrangement of the natural year remaining of three
1117	44 hundred and sixty days and of the five days which were after-
1118	wards ordered to be added; from the first day the festival of the
1119	gods Euergetæ being now carried forward, because of the four
1120	45 years, on to the five days added on before the new civil year; so
1121	that all men may know how the former defect in the arrangement
1122	46 of the seasons, and of the natural year, and of the decrees about
1123	the whole disposition of the pole, happened to be amended and
1124	made perfect by the gods Euergetæ;
1125	47 And whereas a daughter had been born to King Ptolemy and
1126	Queen Berenice, the gods Euergetæ, and was named Berenice, who
1127	was immediately proclaimed a queen; and it happened that this
1128	48 maiden, as on a sudden, passed away into the eternal world, while
1129	the priests who had come up to the king for the year were yet
1130	49 remaining near him, who immediately celebrating a great grief
1131	for what had happened, having thought it right, persuaded the
1132	50 king and queen to consecrate the goddess with Osiris in the
1133	temple of Canopns, which is not only among the principal
1134	temples, but is alsn very much honoured by the king and by all
1135	men throughout the country.
1136	51 And the bringing up of the sacred barge of Osiris is made to
1137	this temple yearly out of the temple in the Heracleium on the
1138	twenty-ninth day of Choeac, while the priests of the course of
1139	52 all the temples, complete the sacrifices upon the altars dedicated
1140	by them for each temple of those which are of the first rank, out
p. 65
1141	LINES 22-26.] ГROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 17
1142	which are held in winter should be held in the summer in each
1143	season, from the change of the festival of the star of Isis by one
1144	day, because of the fourth year as decreed ; and the other assem-
1145	blies, behold, those. which are held belonging to the summer
1146	throughout Egypt, we should hold in the winter in the coming
1147	22 seasons, like what happened to come to pass of old in the chief
1148	provinces, because of this event, if behold the arrangement of the
1149	year shall be made with days three hundred and sixty, and five
1150	additional peculiar days ordered to be added; to celebrate the
1151	additional first day of the assembly unto the gods Euergeta away
1152	from that day, because of the fourth year, until the added five
1153	days additional, which were added upon the new-year's day; so
1154	that it may be made known to all men and women about this
1155	23 former defect in the arrangement in respect of the civil years and
1156	the natural year, and the commands which relate to the judgments
1157	of amendment of the faults of the heavens which happened to
1158	come to pass, behold, it is the production, the adornment solely,
1159	and the excellence of the gods Euergeta.
1160	Whereas when a daughter was born unto King Ptolemy, living
1161	for ever, beloved by Ptbah, and Queen Berenice, the gods Euergeta,
1162	unto them, Berenice was ber name, she was immediately pro-
1163	24 claimed a queen; by accident, behold, the same goddess, a little
1164	woman, was taken away into heaven, whilst the priests who had
1165	come from the country near the king's presence, were yet remain-
1166	ing in the presence of his majesty, celebrating the great lamenta-
1167	tion and the praises, considering about the partieulars, they asked
1168	from the king and queen, the gift from them, to grant to con-
1169	25 secrate the same goddess like Osiris, in the temple of Canopus,
1170	which is among the principal temples, for which great expense of
1171	the Egyptians, expense for them was prepared by the king and the
1172	living men and women of the country.
1173	* At the time when, behold, we shall draw along Osiris during the
1174	drawing along of the barge to the same temple, at the season of
1175	26 the year, from the temple which is in Heracleium, on the twenty-
1176	ninth of the month of Chœeac, when the Egyptians, of the princi-
1177	pal temples at the time of completing the sacrifices upon the altars
p. 66
1178	18 FROM THE GREEK. [LINES 53-61.
1179	53 of both the two divisions of the course, and with these things
1180	that are lawful towards her deification and towards the release
1181	from the grief they bestowed liberally and carefully, as upon the
1182	54 Apis and Mnevis, upon whom it is lawful to be done ;
1183	It seemed fit to pay to Queen Berenice, who had been born to
1184	55 the gods Euergetæ, immortal honours in all the temples through-
1185	out the country; and in the month of Tybi, when she entered
1186	among the gods, (in which month also the daughter of the Sun
1187	in the beginning changed her life,) whom her father having set
1188	56 up named at one time his crown, at another time his eyesight, and
1189	they keep a feast and a water-procession to her in nost of the
1190	temples of the first rank;
1191	57 In this month in which her deification in the beginning took
1192	place, to make also to Queen Berenice, the daughter of the gods
1193	Euergeta, in all the temples throughout the country in the month
1194	58 of Tybi, a festival and a water-procession for four days from the
1195	seveuteenth day in which the water-procession and the release
1196	from the grief was at first made for her;
1197	59 And to complete for her a sacred image of gold and precious
1198	stones in each of the temples of first and of second rank, and to
1199	60 consecrate it in the holy place; and the prophet with the priests
1200	who enter the sanctuary for the robing of the gods shall carry it
1201	in his arms, when the goings out, and the assemblies of the other
1202	61 gods, take place, so that when seen by all it may be honoured
1203	and worshipped, being called the statue of Berenice, queen of
1204	maidens.
p. 67
1205	LINEy 27-31.] FROM THD HIEROGLYPHICS. 19
1206	of the principal temples, by the one part and the other part of the
1207	family of those of that temple, are joining with barps and all the
1208	otber religious ceremonies for the celebration of the dedieation of
1209	her raising up as a goddess, there was made for her a libation to
1210	27 heal the grief of her raising up, they prepared them with perse-
1211	veranee and care, as the ceremonies for the Apis bull and Mnevis
1212	bull are celebrated ;
1213	It was determined that there should be given, according to a
1214	command, immortal honours unto Queen Berenice, the daughter
1215	of the gods Euergetæa, in the temples of the country at the times
1216	at which once upon a time she was taken up among the gods, in
1217	28 the month of Tybi, (the month in which Ra himself took up his
1218	own daughter to heaven, and that is celebrated;) who unto him
1219	was named the apple of his eye, and the asp the ornament of his
1220	bead, the beloved of her father. They shall eelebrate unto her an
1221	assembly with a water-procession in the sanetuaries in the greater
1222	part of the temples of the first rank;
1223	in this month when the making a goddess of the queen
1224	celebrated; in addition there shall be celebrated one assenibly,
1225	there shall be made one water-proeession unto Queen Berenice, the
1226	29 daughter of the gods Euergeta, in the temples of the two regions,
1227	in the times of the month Tybi, from the seventeenth day, when
1228	was kept her water-procession, and was made for her a libation to
1229	heal the grief for her, it was celebrated as on the first day, during
1230	four days ;
1231	To set up a sacred statue untn that goddess of gold and all
1232	30 polisbed stones in the temples of the first rank, in the temples of
1233	the second rank, at the times of conseerating in the holy place;
1234	tbe priest, the prophet, of the sacred barge, with the other ehosen
1235	priests of the great purifications, and those who sing praises to
1236	the gods, and those who robe the gods, he shall earry it in his
1237	two arms, so that it may be seen on the day of the carrying out,
1238	and of the assemblies of the god, in the times; whereby it may
1239	be seen by all men and women that worship is to be paid at once
1240	31 unto the distinguished Berenice, and how the queen of women is
1241	carried out.
1242	0 2
p. 68
1243	20 FROM THE GREEK. [LINES 62-73.
1244	62 And a royal crown is to be placed on her statue, more excellent
1245	than that placed on the statues of her mother the Queen Berenice,
1246	of two ears of corn, between which shall be an asp-shaped crown,
1247	63 and behind this a papyrus-shaped sceptre of the same beight,
1248	such as the goddesses are accustomed to hold in their hands,
1249	around which also the tail of the crown [or asp] shall be twisted, so
1250	64 that from the arrangement of the crown, the name of Berenice
1251	may be clearly shown, according to the character of the sacred
1252	writing.
1253	And when the Kikellia are held in the month of Chœac, before
1254	65 the water-procession of Osiris, the maidens of the temples shall
1255	prepare another image of Berenice, the queen of maidens, unto
1256	which they shall in like manner perform a sacrifice and the other
1257	66 rites which ought to be performed at that feast ;
1258	And it shall be lawful according to this for the otber maidens,
1259	who wish to perform rites unto the goddess, to sing bymns to her,
1260	67 both under the above-named priestly maidens, and those who
1261	furnish necessaries to the gods, when they put the proper crowns
1262	upon the gods, unto whom they are appointed to be priestesses ;
1263	68 And when the early corn seed shall show itself, the holy
1264	maidens shall bring ears of corn to be placed upon the image of
1265	69 the goddess, and the men and women shall sing to her day by
1266	day in the festivals and assemblies of the other gods the songs,
1267	70 which hymns the sacred scribes, when they have written out,
1268	shall give to the master of the singing, and of which copies shall
1269	be written into the sacred books.
1270	71 And when the food is given to the priests out of the temples,
1271	when they are brought out to the multitude, there shall be given
1272	to the daughters of the priests, out of the holy revenue from the
1273	72 day that they are born, the food adjudged by the priestly senators,
1274	those of each of the temples, according to the word of the priests
1275	73 of the revenue; and the bread given to the wives of the priests
1276	shall have a divine pattern, and be called the bread of Berenice.
p. 69
1277	LINES 32-35.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 21
1278	Behold, it is decreed that-the crown upon that sacred statue
1279	shall be not less ceremonial than the appointed crown on the
1280	statues of her mother the Queen Berenice; it is to be placed con-
1281	spicuously with two ears of corn, and an asp on the back, and a
1282	sceptre of papyrus flowers, to be held up; the papyrus flowers,
1283	the crown and the asp, the same as what is customary in the two
1284	hands of the goddesses; the tail of the same asp is to be twisted
1285	32 on that sceptre; by which arrangement between those ears of
1286	corn may be shown the name of Berenice in the characters of the
1287	scribes of heavenly life.
1288	And during the days of the celebration of the Kikellia, in the
1289	month of Chœac, in addition to the water-procession of Osiris, it
1290	shall be granted unto the women, the wives of the priests, to
1291	prepare another statue of Berenice chief of women, and to
1292	33 perform sacrifices and other things, which shall be celebrated
1293	upon the days of that assembly.
1294	By tbis, it is decreed, behold, for other women who are willing,
1295	that they shall celebrate their own unto that goddess, and sing
1296	hymns to that goddess, behold, under chosen priestesses, and
1297	servant-priestesses who carry the things that are carried of the
1298	gods, to whom they are appointed for priestly romen.
1299	When, behold, the early corn has sprung up and is con-
1300	34 spicuous, the priestesses of the first rank shall bring ears of corn
1301	and give them to the statue of the same goddess; they shall sing
1302	songs to her upon appointed times; these songs the men and
1303	women, both husbands and wives shall sing in places, and assem-
1304	blies, at the carrying out of the gods, songs from among which a
1305	man of heavenly life shall give unto the chief learned man of the
1306	singers to write a copy in the books of heavenly life.
1307	Because of this when the dedicated loaves are distributed to
1308	35 the priests from out of the temples to those already of the family
1309	of the chief priest of the temple of any place, there shallbe dis-
1310	tributed presence bread unto the daughters of the chiefs of the
1311	priests, since the day of their birth was celebrated, from the
1312	sacred dedicated loaves of the gods out of the presence bread
1313	marked with a pattern, as adjudged by the priests the senators in
p. 70
1314	22 FROM THE GREEK. [LINES 74-76.
1315	And he that bas been appointed superior and chief priest, in
1316	74 each of the temples, and the scribes of the temples, shall write
1317	this decree upon a tablet of stone or copper in letters sacred, and
1318	75 Egyptian, and Greek; and shall place it in the most conspicuous
1319	place in the temples of first, of second, and of third rank, so that
1320	the priests throughout the country may show to those who honour
1321	76 the gods Euergetæ what is right.
p. 71
1322	LINES 36, 37.] FROM THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 23
1323	the sanctuaries of the two regions, hencefortb agreeably to the
1324	command of the priests of the dedicated loaves; and the loaves
1325	36 which are given to the wives of the priests shall be marked with a
1326	pattern impressed upon the loaf, put thcreon; and they are to be
1327	named the loaves of Berenice.
1328	The same learned prophet of the place, the consecrated scribe
1329	of the senators, the representatives of all the temple-priests, the
1330	chief of the temple-yard priests, and the scribes of the temples,
1331	37 shall carve the inscription on a tablet of stone or copper, in letters
1332	of heavenly life, letters for books, letters for the Greeks, to be set
1333	up in a conspicuous place for men and women in the temples of
1334	the first rank, temples of the second rank, temples of the third
1335	rank, so that sight of it may be given to all men and women how
1336	preparation is to be made, by the priests of the temples of the
1337	cities of Egypt, for the gods Euergetæ and their children; bebold,
1338	the religious ceremonies for the doings.
1339	ABBREVIATIONS IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES.
1340	D.S. means the Determinative Sign, or figure of an object, following its
1341	name spelt with letters.
1342	Voc. means the Author's Vocabulary, accompanying his work on "Egyptian
1343	Hieroglyphics."
p. 72
1344	EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS.
1345	Line I
1346	] The YeAR; BAI, I, followed by a ring, the Determinative.
1347	Sign for Time, which is used also in the words Month and Day.
1348	The first character is the palm branch, in Coptic Bar; the second,
1349	I, may be the feminine article; and the D.S. thus distinguishes
1350	two words which were spelt and sounded nearly alike. This is
1351	the eros, or civil year, used in dates, as distinguished from
1352	No. 7, 33, the evauros, or natural year of the seasons. Voc.953.
1353	That the D.S. is a picture of the sun is shown at No. 5, 22,
1354	where it has the vowel following. it, and is the word, pr, the sun.
1355	The word BAI, for year, is not known in Coptie; but see No. 5,
1356	22: єTєpoeeni, where our character for BAI is the last syllable,
1357	MPI. The character for T is the picture of a Hill, and gains its
1358	force from Tar, a hill. The Hebrew letter n may perhaps be a
1359	rude copy of it; as it is called by its Egyptian name, Tau.
1360	2 NINTH; nine strokes followed by the definite article T, which,
1361	however, in Coptic, is prefixed, not postfixed, to the Cardinal
1362	number to make an Ordinal.
1363	3 In the month of APelLaIus, the Macedonian month which,
1364	began in the middle of November; A,P,A,L,A,A, O,S, followed by
1365	the ring, the D.S. for time. Here we might learn the force of
1366	four letters, if they were not otherwise known. The bawk, in
1367	Coptic & gOll, may, by careless pronunciation, by dropping the
1368	last letter, have been called AO, and hence given its foree to
1369	the letter. In this way all the letters probably received their
1370	foree. They had probably all, at first, syllabic sounds, rather than
1371	alphabetie; and we shall see tbat those characters in which two
1372	consonants were elearly sounded never got into use as letters.
1373	1 UPoN tbe DAX; S,S,0; caca upon; with the word Day
1374	omitted, but represented by the D.S. for Time. See No. 3,21,
1375	and 13, 42.
p. 73
1376	LINE 1.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 25
1377	5 SEVENTH; seven strokes, but with no letters to make the
1378	Cardinal number into an Ordinal, as in the word Ninth, No. 2.
1379	6 TYBI; the Egyptian month, written not phonetically, by cha-
1380	racters whose sound represented the word, but symbolically,
1381	expressive of' the meaning. The names of the months seem to be
1382	the only hieroglyphical words so written. The first character
1383	means FIrsT, the second House, see Nos. 2, 18; the third R, for
1384	Ips, to do; making together THE FIRST OF HOUSING, followed by
1385	the D.S. for Time. Voc. 981, 995.
1386	7 SEVENTEEN; seven strokes, with the half ring for ten, as at
1387	No. 15, 24.
1388	8 ACCORDING TO; N, the preposition ir, of. Voc. 1292. This
1389	character is the representation of water, of which the Egyptian
1390	name was, as we learn from Horapollo, Noun. Hence came, after
1391	several changes, both the form and name of the Hebrew letter
1392	Nun.
1393	9 The EayPTIaNs; CH, O, plural, a shortened form of CH, M,O,
1394	Xня, Egypt. Voc. 775. See No. 8, 31, Which is not so
1395	shortened. It seems to be used as an adjective to the following
1396	substantive. See also Saviour-Gods. No. 12, 2, for the force
1397	of the first letter.
1398	10 Country; the line with three dots is TO, the next letter, E or
1399	I, making TO1, lands; followed by T, the definite article, which
1400	in Coptic would be prefixed; and by the circular D.S. for a City
1401	or Country. Voc. 777.
1402	11 In the REIGN; CH, R,B. In Coptic Xupr is Powerful,
1403	which may well be part of our word; Xwpi, is to strike, which
1404	is not quite so suitable. The last letter B is from BW, and
1405	represents a club, or short sceptre. See No. 2, 19, where this
1406	letter is again used.
1407	12 SE, T; the twig is O€, a plant. This is the name of one of the
1408	four orders of Egyptian priests. Voc. 644. It is usually spelt
1409	SETEN. Voc. 648. It is in Herodotus written Sethon, as the
1410	title of an Egyptian general ; Manetho writes it Sethos as a title of
1411	Rameses II. It was used more particularly for the king of Upper
1412	Egypt, as the following priestly title was for Lower Egypt.
p. 74
1413	26 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 1.
1414	Together they represent the Greek word King, meaning of Upper
1415	and Lower Egypt. See No. 8, 24.
1416	13 NOU, T; the name of an order of priests, and a royal title
1417	belonging more particularly to Lower Egypt. Voe. 663.
1418	14 ProLeMy; P,T,O,L,M,A,A,S. The king's manıe, including
1419	some of his titles, is written within an oval ring with a flat end.
1420	This ring seems meant to represent an engraved signet-ring. As
1421	the artist could not write the name on the flat seal, be has written
1422	it within the ring. The other royal nanes, as Arsinoe, Alex-
1423	ander, Berenice, are inclosed in the same ovals. The M in this
1424	name may be the origin of the Hehrew D.
1425	I5 LIvInG;bere written with an O, the short for osD Voc.
1426	1402, 1407. This particular O, is never ased except in this
1427	word. It may be seen carried in the hand of the Egyptian gods,
1428	and otherwise used as an ornament. It has been called a key;
1429	but the character for a key is drawn rather differently.
1430	16 For EVER; H,T,N; QHTEN, the end, is the Coptic word
1431	nearest to this well-known hieroglyphic. Voc. 594. We may
1432	compare this with the Greek expression, in the New Testament,
1433	Els Tou aswva until the end of the age, or until the beginning
1434	of the next age; which we sometimes render For ever. The
1435	horizontal line is N, and is in place of the wavy line No. 1,8,
1436	and must not be confounded with the T, the first letter in No. 1,
1437	10. See the Rosatta stone, where this word is sometimes
1438	written with one form of N, and sometines with the other.
1439	17 By Prhan, the god of Memphis, as Ra was of Thebes; P,T,H.
1440	Voc. 195.
1441	18 BELOVED; M, for elHi to love. Voc. 1500. Together these
1442	two words mean By Pthah beloved. Had the word Love stood
1443	first, they would have meant Loving Pthah. Both forms were
1444	used by Rameses II., namely Mi-amun, and Amun-mai.
1445	19 Son; S,E, for дyHpe. Voc. 1789. The goose has the force
1446	of an S from GECyE, a goose.
1447	20 OF; N, the proposition Sr; see No. 8.
1448	21 PrOLEMY; see No. 1, 14.
1449	ARSINOE; A,R,S,I,N,A, with T,S; of which S is the feminine
p. 75
1450	LINE 1.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 27
1451	termination, and T the feminine article, which is prefixed in
1452	Coptic, but in the Hieroglyphics usually postfixed, as in No.
1453	14,14; and sometimes inserted before the last letter, as in No.
1454	9,35 and No. 23, 47. The R in this nane is the same character
1455	as the Lin Ptolemy. The Egyptians rarely distinguisbed those
1456	two letters. The egg may have the force of an S, from being a
1457	goose's egg, and used for the goose GEUyE, or it may be from
1458	the word cw0x&!, an egg.
1459	23 BROTHER-GODs, the title of the second Ptolemy and his
1460	second queen; in Greek Brother-loving. This queen was also his
1461	sister. The third Ptolemy was not the son of this queen, but of
1462	the first wife, and hence not in strietness the son of the Brother-
1463	gods. The hatchet or mailet has the force of NOU, from rroyT
1464	to bruise, and represents MOVTE a god, with or without an addi-
1465	tional I. The other character is S, for CON a brother. See
1466	No. 2,12 for Brother.
1467	24 PRIEST, represented pietorially by a man in the act of making
1468	a libation to the gods. As the word is not spelt, its sound is
1469	doubtful. It may be the hieroglyphical word OTHPH, dedi-
1470	cated, from OVOTEß to pour out an offering.
1471	25 Or; N; N, of; another form of the preposition, No. 1, 8.
1472	See Voc. 1295. It represents the crown peculiar to Lower
1473	Egypt, and worn by the priests of the order Nout, No. 13. Its
1474	name was probably EIN, and hence it is the letter N. The word
1475	OvEN, shining, explains the meaning of its name, as it was the
1476	Holy Crown of Exodus xxix. 6, the Bright Plate of Exod.
1477	xxV11I. 36.
1478	26 ALEXANDER; A,L,K,S,A,A,N,I,R,S; or to the mouth might
1479	be given the force of RO, from po, a mouth; and thus we should
1480	have the vowel required to make Alexandros. The Greek R takes
1481	its nanıe Rho from the Egyptian name of this character. The hand
1482	is a T, from TOT, a hand; and the Hebrew letter Teth, which is
1483	also a hand, is kuown to be borrowed from this by its keeping its
1484	Egyptian name.
1485	27 DECEASED; M,O; eeos to die. The second letter is of
1486	doubtful force; but the place of the word shows what is required.
p. 76
1487	28 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 1.
1488	See Voc. 1645, also 1640, for the more usual fornis of this word,
1489	which is of very frequent use after a person's name.
1490	28 AND; A,H; a2d and. Vuc. 1271. The arm is A, a force
1491	which perhaps may be found in led 2E a cubit measure, in which
1492	word the le may be a servile affix.
1493	29 The BrOTHEr-GODs, the same as No. 1, 23.
1494	30 AND, the same as No. 1,28.
1495	31 The GODs EvErGETa, or BENtractoRs, the title of the now
1496	reigning sovereigns, the third Ptolemy and his queen. The
1497	smaller character may Sy&x, benevolent, useful. We shall find
1498	it with the force of SH at No. 5, 16 ; No. 16, 34, and No. 29, 32.
1499	It represents LyE a staff, and thence takes its name. The Egyp-
1500	tians, whether kings or great landowners, usually hold in their
1501	hands a long staff, which rests on the ground, called in Hebrew
1502	the staff of inheritance, and also a short sceptre. The character
1503	in this word is probably the staff, with the place for the hand to
1504	grasp it near the top, while the character in No. 1, 11, is the
1505	short sceptre, with the place for the band near the bottom.
1506	32 APOLLONIDEs; A,P,O,L,A,N,I,I,S, followed by the figure of
1507	a man sitting on the ground, the usual D.S. after the name of a
1508	private person. It answers the purpose of the ring, the sign of a
1509	royal name. The letter I is written by a double A; the hand, I,
1510	has also the foree of D, a letter not known in Egyptian words.
1511	Line 2.
1512	1 THaT, or who, meaning the son of, agreeably to the Greek
1513	idiom, where the word Son is omitted. It is PH,N, or P,N.
1514	See No. 2,7 for the force of the P. See No. 13, 14 and 13, 47 ;
1515	also No. 2, 15 and 3, 26, where the same word has a P of a
1516	different form. Voc. 1376. We may conjecture that it repre-
1517	sents:I1 the, TT who, as in its present form it is not found in
1518	Coptic.
1519	2 MoscHIon; E,M,O,S,K,I,A,N; followed by the usual D.S. for
1520	a man. We very frequently find in hieroglyphies a vowel omitted
1521	before the liquids M,N, and R, hut bere, in a very unusual way,
1522	we find a vowel unnecessarily prefixed. The translator, in his
1523	care to write tbe Greek name fully, writes EM for M. The owl,
p. 77
1524	LINE 2] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 29
1525	M, is often the syllable MO, and hence amongst the various
1526	forms of the letter M is chosen because it is to be followed by an
1527	O. The unnecessary addition of the O shows the translator's
1528	careful exactness. Towards the end of the inscription, letters are
1529	more freely omitted.
1530	3 AND; A,0; ArW. In other places this group represents
1531	or, the prefix for the indefinite article.
1532	4 MENECRATEIA; E,M,A,N,A,K,R,A,T,A, followed by the D.S.
1533	of a woman sitting. Here, as in the name of Moschion, No. 2, 2,
1534	we have # M very unnecessarily written for M. The more
1535	common D.S. for a woman is a figure sitting with the knees on
1536	the ground, and holding a flower in her hand, see Voc. 1757. But
1537	throughout this inscription she is distinguished from a man only
1538	by an ornanient on the head.
1539	5 The DAUGHTEr; T,S,T. The one T is the definite article
1540	feminine, the other the feininine termination of the noun. Voc.
1541	1797. See the word Son, No. 1,19.
1542	6 OF; N, the preposition sr, as No. 1, 8.
1543	7 PHILammon; PH,I,L,A,M,A,N, with D.S. of a man. The
1544	last two letters may be said to be misplaced for the artist's con-
1545	venience. But it is often difficult to know which of two letters is
1546	to be read first, as in the cases of No. 1, 28, and No. 20,2. The
1547	owl has its force as MI from erar, solitary, and is in Coptic
1548	кaкkaмas, the solitary of the dark. Philammon is a Greek
1549	translation of the name Mi-amun; they both mean Loving the
1550	God Amun, and are formed like Philosopher, a luver of wisdom.
1551	They may be contrasted with Amun-mai, and Theophilus, whieh
1552	contain the word Beloved, not Loving; and theyare a proof that.
1553	the Egyptians, like the Jews, taught the duty of loving their gods,
1554	which remark cannot be made upon the names of Greeks and
1555	Romans.
1556	8 BEArER, a figure carrying a burden on the head, which when
1557	joined to the next word BAsKET, becomes BASKET-BEARER. But
1558	in otber cases this figure is the word CoNspIcuous. See No. 37,
1559	18, &c.
1560	Of BAsKEr; T,N,A, with the D.S. of a basket; probably
p. 78
1561	30 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYFHICS. [LINE 2.
1562	XăNo, a basket, as in consequence of the nation's use of gutturals,
1563	the I and Th are not only confounded with H, but often with G,
1564	Ch, and K. Thus Champsi, the name of the crocodile in Hero-
1565	dotus, is in hieroglyphics Themsi, Voc. 1861, and gives its name
1566	to Lake Temsi ; EOWuy Ethiopia is in Hebrew Cush. From the
1567	same reason Nubia, named from sorß gold, is in Hebrew Knub,
1568	and Kub.
1569	10 FoR; N,E,M, Nell. The unusual character written across
1570	the owl is probably E; see No. 23, I1, for this word written with
1571	a more usual letter, and No. 23, 18, and 24, 35, for the force of
1572	this unusual letter.
1573	11 ARSINOE. See No. 1, 22.
1574	12 BrOTHEr; see No. I, 23, where the first letter forms part of
1575	Brother-gods. The word is here S,N,E; CuN, brother, but with
1576	a final vowel, which in Coptie would make it sister. But in
1577	hieroglyphies this particular E is usually a masculine termination,
1578	as to Son No. I, 19; to Father No. 4, 4. It probably, like our
1579	final E mute, did no more than lengthen the foregoing vowel.
1580	The wine-bottle N, is in the large sculptures represented as
1581	transparent, and as only half full; and makes it probable that
1582	the Egyptians had a name for wine like our own name, and the
1583	Latin Vinum, and the Hebrew "", which would give its force to.
1584	that bottle as an N. Voc. 1837.
1585	13 LOVING; M; eefs, to love. The character is EllE, a plow
1586	or hoe, and thus gains its foree. Here we see that it is not always
1587	from the first letter in the word that the character takes its force
1588	as a letter, but from that which is most important. Had not the
1589	Greeks translated these two words Philadelphus, or Brother-loving,
1590	it rould be more natural to read, By brother beloved, as in the case
1591	of No. 1, 16, and 17, where the adjective also follows the noun,
1592	and is read By Pthah beloved. Voc. 1499.
1593	14 On Dar; E; €2008, followed by a circle, the D.S. of time.
1594	In No.1, 1, the same D.S. was used for Year, and in No. 1,3,
1595	for Month. Voc. 1010. See Day, No. 13, 46.
1596	15 THAT, THE SAME; P,N, perhaps formed from the article T8
1597	the; as No. 2, 1. It is a pronoun following the substantive,
p. 79
1598	LINE 2.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 31
1599	and so used in No. 3, 26 and 15, 9; which places quite establish
1600	its meaning. Compare No. 13, 49, Our.
1601	16 A WRITING; S,SH,O,I, with the D.S. of a roll of papyrus tied
1602	round with string; CDas to write. Voc. 331. The sitting man
1603	is here simply the letter I; compare Voc. 1982 and 1983.
1604	17 The CHIers; A,O,MB, plural; aeepuy, the title of chief
1605	bakers in the Book of Genesis. The first two letters are the in-
1606	definite article Or; see No. 34, 33, for the word in its more
1607	simple form. Voc. 1328.
1608	18 Of the TemPLes; M,E, plural. The M is for the syllahle
1609	Amun, the name of the god; E is H3, a house, in the plural
1610	HOY houses; hence Amun-ei, a temple, or house of Amun. The
1611	word Memnonium is Mi-amun-ei, the house of one loving Amun.
1612	The letter E in this word resembles the ground plan of a house,
1613	and is often used as the D.S. for Temple. The Egyptian temples
1614	were of various ranks of holiness, and we shall find three ranks
1615	spoken of in this Decree. This word embraces them all, including
1616	those of the lower ranks, and hence perhaps the letter E must be
1617	understood as the ground plan of a courtyard, which was less
1618	holy than the building, as that was less holy than the inner cell.
1619	Voc. 498.
1620	19 HIGH PRIESTs; NOU,B; NOrHß a priest, a word formed,
1621	not from NOYT, god, as night be supposed from the hieroglyphics,
1622	but from sia oraß, belonging to what is holy. Hence while the
1623	hieroglyphic seems related to No. 1,29, it is not so etymologically.
1624	Compare Voc. 298, 302. The word is repeated three times,
1625	instead of adding the three strokes for the plural. In this way
1626	the sculptor makes his work more ornamental. The club, as at
1627	No. 1, 11, gains its force from BW, wood. If, as is probable,
1628	the various words for Priest, though translated alike in the Greek,
1629	represent men of different rank, this word means the priests of
1630	higher rank, while No. 1, 24, the man making a libation, is of
1631	lower rank, or may be the more general word, including priests of
1632	several kinds. See No. 12, 27 and 28, for further proof that this
1633	title belongs to the priests of the highest rank.
1634	20 GUARDIANS OF THE TEMPLes, if we may read the characters
p. 80
1635	32 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, [LINK 2.
1636	figuratively, while we are not helped by the Coptie language, or
1637	the Greek translation. Anubis the jackal, is the servant of the
1638	gods, and is here lying on the roof of the temple.
1639	PUrIFIERs; the characters are a flame of fire and a vase of
1640	water. Voe. 361. Compare No. 16, 23, where the D.S. for
1641	water changes this word into Libations.
1642	22 Perhaps THOSE WHO SING, Or PRAISE; S,EM,R,?,U; CerOs,
1643	praise, and pw a mouth. The owl and arm are EM; the flower,
1644	a dloubtful character may be an O, from ONWs to cultivate. A
1645	flower has that force at No. 32, 6. See No. 30, 13, for the sanze
1646	word.
1647	Line 3.
1648	1 Hymns; the bird is the word orpo king, the perch on which
1649	it stands is T, making together, OrpoT a hymn. The tbree dots
1650	are the plural sign. Compare No. 3, 18, His majesty.
1651	2 Perhaps THOSE WHO ROBE THE GCDS. The principal character
1652	is a collar to be placed on the statue. See No. 30, 15.
1653	The latter characters in this word, SN and three dots, are a
1654	very common plural ending in Hieroglyphies, but they are not
1655	met with in Coptic. They may be crray two, which would be
1656	a very natural form in Hebrew, where the plural is understood to
1657	mean Iwo, but little suitable here where the plural has always
1658	three strokes, and where the dual is so frequently used, as in No.
1659	1,23 and 29 and 31. On the other hand, in other inseriptions
1660	this termination is sometimes, though less frequently, spelt, TN
1661	and three dots. See No. 27, 16. For this we might find a more
1662	natural origin in the pronoun TN, which we often find following
1663	a substantive, as at No. 24, 6. Or it may be the indefinite plural
1664	article ZaN, prefixed in Coptic, but in bieroglyphies, as usual,
1665	postfixed. In some few cases this plural termination is written
1666	with SM, as perhaps No. 18, 12, and 32,3.
1667	3 WRITERS OF THE SACRED BOOKS. This must be understood
1668	as one word, because the plural sign covers the whole of it. The
1669	characters are an inkstand or pallet, with a reed pen for Writing,
1670	No. 15, 13; God, No. 5, 15; a roll of papyrus tied with a string,
1671	and T,E, the end of the word, Book, and the D.S. of a nian.
p. 81
1672	LINE 3.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 33
1673	4 PROPHET; R, CH; forming Ip1, to do, and XW, speech. In
1674	so rendering we are supported by the Greek. See Fame, No.
1675	10,23.
1676	5 OTHERs; CH, 1,0, plural; KET, other. Voc. 1127. See also
1677	No. 5,25, &c.
1678	6 DIVINE; NOU, T,F, plural; sOST, god. The final F is ef he,
1679	and here seems to make the substantive into an adjective.
1680	7 Probably HAVING PURIFIED THEMSELVES. The men seem to
1681	be pouring holy water upon themselves.
1682	& BEING ASSEMBLED TOGETHER; H,A,?,T,N,?; S,N, plural; formed
1683	from DorwT, to assemble. If the lock of hair be cfos, hair, the
1684	next syllable may be srEC, a sailor, meaning that they came
1685	down the Nile by boat.
1686	9 HaVING coMt; A,M. The feet are put on to the first letter as
1687	figurative of motion; and it may be from delE, to come. See
1688	No. 21,14.
1689	10 THE IWO PROVINCES. The dual form of this word very much
1690	restriets its meaning. See No. 18, 7.
1691	11 UPPer and LowEr EgypT; the D.S. of the two countries, each
1692	distinguished by its peenliar erown. That of Upper Egypt, with
1693	a ball on the top, is in Exodus xxvili. 36, 37, called the Linen
1694	Mitre, and that of Lower Egypt, the Bright Plate of gold, which
1695	was put over the former. When so placed they together fornied
1696	the double crown called Pschent.
1697	12 AND; A,O, arW, as No. 2,3; more probably or, the in-
1698	definite article, as in No. 5, 22.
1699	13 Drus, the Macedonian month; T,I,A,O,S. The letter D was
1700	not known in Egypt.
1701	14 FIFTH DAY; the cirele, the D.S. of time, for the word Day, and
1702	five strokes, the numeral.
1703	15 THE CELEBRATION. See No. 21, 16, and 21, 36.
1704	16 ANNIVERSARY. The palm-branch is the word Year, as in
1705	No. 1, 1. The dish is part of the word Assembly, meaning a Fes-
1706	tival, No. 18, 32, &e.
1707	17 Or; the preposition as at No. 1, 25.
1708	18 HIS MAJESTY, is a convenient rendering of this group. It
1709	D
p. 82
1710	34 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 3.
1711	contains the hawk with the whip of Osiris, which bird must be
1712	distinguished from the vowel A, which we have already met with
1713	so frequently. It is the word orpo, king, and often the name
1714	Horus. The sceptre in front we have seen in the word Reign,
1715	No. 1, 11. The pereh, a I, may make it a feminine word, while
1716	the F, 9, beneath, is the pronoun His.
1717	19 Possibly WAS CELEBRATED CONSPICUOUSIY; A,M; perhaps
1718	Elll, to remember, with the D.S. of a man placing a crown
1719	on his head, which in this inscription is used for the word
1720	conspicuous. See No. 28, 43, Celebrated, and No. 37,118, con-
1721	spicuous. In the Rosetta Stone this latter character means To
1722	wear a crown, and is also part of the word Kingdom.
1723	20 LIKEWISE; H,N,A, ZIsia. Voc. 1273.
1724	21 UPoN; S,S,0, Caca; the same as No. 1, 4, but with another
1725	form of the O.
1726	22 The IWENTY-FIFTH DAY; with the cirele, the D.S. for Day,
1727	and the numerals as in No. 1,7, and 29, 12.
1728	23 Or; M, el, the sign of the genitive case, or the preposition.
1729	See No. 6, 26.
1730	24 Monru, being a moon followed by SO, T,T, perhaps cywBT,
1731	to change, and the ring, the D.S. for time. The T,T, may stand
1732	for the Coptic BT, as the R,R, stands for &P in No. 10, 26.
1733	The star is very suitably chosen for an S in a word relating to
1734	the heavenly bodies.
1735	25 THAT, THE SAME, as No. 2, 15.
1736	It follows its substantive. Voc. 1376.
1737	26 RecEIveD; possibly СУНП, to receive, as the second character is
1738	a P. The first may be CYH, wood, meaning the wooden frame on
1739	which a weaver stretches his threads. The last is an A, and may
1740	be chosen symbolieally, or it may be a D.S.
1741	27 HIs MAJEsTy, as No. 3, 18. It is the nominative case,
1742	following the verb.
1743	28 The KINGDOM; A, HOR, O; Orpo, king; with a character the
1744	mark of an abstract idea. The bird is the royal bird, as in
1745	No. 3,18, and 27. The last character corresponds to the Coptic
1746	prefix MeET, which changes orpo into reetospo, Kingdom;
1747	and Priest into Priesthood, in the Rosetta Stone.
p. 83
1748	EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 35
1749	Line 4.
1750	HIs, 1,t; in the feminine, to agree with the word kingdom.
1751	I is a teminine article, as in No. 1, 22, and 2, 5, and elsewhere
1752	frequently. See No. 4, 5, for His in the masculine.
1753	2 GrEAT, CH, R,T, xwps, with the feminine article, as in the
1754	last word. Voc. 1603.
1755	3 From; EM, Ell; as No. 24, 35, where the vowel is of a
1756	different form. This is the same preposition as No. 3, 23, where
1757	it is written without the vowel. Voc. 1309.
1758	4 FATHER; T,F,E; the word used on the Rosetta Stone.
1759	Voc. 1817. See No. 15, 17.
1760	5 HIs. F, q, the pronoun suffix. Compare No. 4, 1, where
1761	this pronoun is in the feminine.
1762	6 HAVING CELEBRATED; A,M,O; possibly from Eles, to re-
1763	member, as conjectured at No. 3, 19, and 19, 7.
1764	7 RELIGIOUs HoNours; T,O,T, with D.S, and S.N the plural
1765	termination of No. 3, 2, but without the three strokes. Fronı
1766	OONWT, an image, and also a congregation. See No. 17, 32,
1767	where the word is spelt rather differently, and No. 20,22. Voe.
1768	573.
1769	8 In or Or, R or I. There is no authority in Coptic for a pre-
1770	position of this form, but this letter seems to have that force also
1771	on the Rosetta Stone, where we read very clearly "the blessings
1772	of a kingdor remaining to himself and his children." But in
1773	the Bashmurie dialect we have €2, the preposition to, borrowed
1774	perhaps from the Hebrew prefix, 3. Voc. 1335. Or it may be
1775	tbe common preposition E&P&I, which elsewhere we find written
1776	RR.
1777	9 TEMPLE, literally, DIvINE House, followed by T,E, Hr, house,
1778	with the feminine article. Thus the word is expressed first
1779	pictorially, and then by a letter, which letter is itself the ground
1780	plan of a house, or rather of a courtyard. Voc. 521.
1781	Or; N,T; NT; the sigu of the genitive. Voc. 1319.
1782	I1 GODS EVErGEra, as No. 1, 31.
1783	12 WEICH; N,T,E, NTE. See No. 4, 10. The word is written
1784	in Coptic with or without the final vowel. In the Rosetta
1785	D 2
p. 84
1786	36 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, [LINE 4.
1787	Stone the preposition No. 4, 10, is spelt in this way. Voc.
1788	1320.
1789	13 IN; M; Ell, the sigu of the genitive. But in Hieroglyphies
1790	it seems to be a preposition with a very varying force of either
1791	In, Of, or From.
1792	14 Canopus, so rendered in the Greek; P,K,O,T, followed by T,
1793	the feminine article, and then by the D.S. of a city. The city of
1794	Canopus is on the coast, about fifteen miles from Alexandria, and
1795	being at the mouth of the deepest branch of the Nile, it was
1796	rising in wealth and population with the growth of foreign trade;
1797	but when Alexander built his new capital, the trade of Canopus
1798	was stopped by an edict of Cleomenes, in favour of the Greeks of
1799	Alexandria. Canopus, however, remained a place of importance,
1800	and became the religious capital, and the ceutre of Egyptian
1801	learning. The priests had declared that the Canopic branch of
1802	the river, as being the deepest, was the Agathodæman, or river-
1803	god. The jars with gods' heads, used in burial, were called
1804	Canopic jars. There Buergetes built a temple to Osiris, and the
1805	gold plate on whieh he dedicated to the god has lately been
1806	found. When Christianity rose in Alexandria in the second
1807	century, even the Greek paganism took refuge in Canopus.
1808	Eunapius and Rufinus, in the fourth century, testify to Canopus
1809	as being the seat of the anciont priestly learning, and of the
1810	study of hieroglyphics, together with the practice of a variety of
1811	magical and superstitious arts. All this very well agrees with its
1812	being the city in which the representatives of the Egyptian priest-
1813	hood met in Senate in the reign of Ptolemy Euergetes.
1814	15 DECLARED; I,B,H,T,R; P&TOp, to urge, which is from
1815	atop, force, preceded by sps, to make.
1816	16 THIs; N,I, as No. 4, 10, and 4, 12.
1817	17 DECREE; SOT, N; CONTEN, just. The rabbit has its name
1818	from OWT2, to burrow; and its name, spelt SOAT, is written
1819	over a picture of the animal in Rosellini's "Monumenti Civile,"
1820	pl. 20. This word is used so frequently on this tablet, that
1821	there can be no doubt about its meaning. Voc. 1692. See
1822	= also the word CWTEll, to hear. No. 31, 37.
p. 85
1823	LINE 4.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 37
1824	18, 19 KINg, as explained at No. 1, 12, and 13.
1825	20 PrOLEMY; see No. 1, 14.
1826	21,22 LIVING FOR EVER; see No. 1, 15, and 16.
1827	23,24 BELOVED By PrHAH; see No. 1, 17, and 18.
1828	25 SON; see No. 1, 19.
1829	26 OF; see No. 1,8, and 20.
1830	27 PrOLEMY; see No. 1,21.
1831	28 AND; see No. 1, 28, and 30. In the former sentence the
1832	conjunction was omitted between No. 1, 21, and 22.
1833	29 ARSINOE; see No. 1, 22.
1834	30 The BROTHER-GODS; see No. 1, 23.
1835	31 LIKEWIsE; see No. 3, 20.
1836	32 QUFEN; three letters followed by the D.S. of a woman,
1837	for which see No. 2, 4. Voc. 675. Without the final I, the
1838	feminine article, this word would have been king, No. 10, 43,
1839	Voc. 674.
1840	33 BErenIcE; B,R,N,I,K,A, with T,S, the feminine article and
1841	termination, as in No. 1, 22, and 4, 29.
1842	34 His Sister, or more literally, Brother, as the feminine termi-
1843	nation is wanting. See No.8, 40. Note, that Berenice was not
1844	the king's sister, but was so styled in compliment, as in Solomon's
1845	Song the king styles his wife his sister.
1846	35 WIFE; E,T, followed by the D.S., a figure which in this case
1847	holds the ornament on her head. In Copie ¿ar is a husband, to
1848	which if we add the feminine article I, we get this word Wife.
1849	Voc. 1833.
1850	36 The GoDs EVERGETa. See No. 1, 31.
1851	37 Hе; P,E; ПН; He, but meaning They; the singular used
1852	for the plural, as No. 24, 29. The Head, are, has the force
1853	of P.
1854	38 MADE; I,R. from Ipl, to make. See No. 17, 33; and also
1855	No. 16, 22, where the order of the letters is reversed.
1856	39 CoLumns; they are in the form of a papyrus stalk, witb a bud
1857	for the capital.
1858	Line 5.
1859	1 ExPENSE; K,N, plural; KHN, fruit, income. This word bears
p. 86
1860	38 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 5.
1861	nearly the same meaning at No. 5, 40, and 9, 23, where it is
1862	followed by an arm, the D.S. of receiving.
1863	2 GREAT, in the plural; see No. 4, 2, where it was in the
1864	feminine singular.
1865	3 FoR; M, a preposition, used with similar force at No. 5, 32,
1866	though in the Coptic it is the sign of the genitive, meaning of.
1867	B Op: Nt,ted, belonging to. See No. 1, 8, and 20, where it is
1868	spelt with an N only, and that of a different form; but see
1869	No. 11,17, and 7,22. Voc. 1298.
1870	6 COUNTRY; as No. 1, 10.
1871	7 A,O; or; the indefinite article, as at No. 6, 21, where it is
1872	equally not wanted.
1873	8 EGyrt, in one of the very various ways in whieh it is written.
1874	The character above the figure of a country is at No. 17, 29, and
1875	No. 17, 35, very distinctly translated At the public expense, as of
1876	a festival. At No. 21, 44, it is equally distinctly Seasons of the
1877	year. In other inscriptions it is a Sculptor, being written over a
1878	man in that employment. What it represents is doubtful. But
1879	if we may give to it the force Chem, for XHees, Egypt, in this
1880	place; it maythen be part of Or& 2Ell, or Suitable, when applied
1881	to the festival; and Xilel, to invent, when the title of the artist.
1882	In what way it can mean the Seasons of the year is not clear. In
1883	some such way we must tryto reconcile seeming contradictions.
1884	See also No. 8, 9, where our difficulty about this character is
1885	further increased, and it has the force of Cham, but with another
1886	meaning.
1887	9 All; the adjective belonging to Temples, No. 5, 4. The
1888	basket or dish without a handle is NEB, and must be distinguished
1889	from the dish with a bandle, which is K. The final T is not
1890	found in the Coptie word sißd, all, which this group represents.
1891	10 He; as No. 4,37.
1892	I1 PREPARED; from CHBs, a sword, which the two hands are
1893	holding, we get COBTE, to prepare. The final R is sps, to do.
1894	See No. 25, 20, and 37, 34.
1895	12 Possibly OBELIscS, or columns of another form from No, 4, 39.
p. 87
1896	LINE 5.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 39
1897	13 Perhaps CoLOsSAL STATues; P,P, plural, from aqpue,
1898	a giant. The Greek has only the general term Honours, in place
1899	of these niore definite objects. See No. 4, 37, where the human
1900	head has the force of a P. At No. 27, 16, where this word is
1901	again rendered Honours, it can hardly mean colossal statues.
1902	14 FoR; the preposition, as No. 1, 8.
1903	15 The GoDs. Here the hatchet has the force of NOUT, and is
1904	followed by the vowel E, to make SrOyTE. In Voc. 271 the word
1905	God is written with the hatchet and the letter T, giving to the
1906	hatchet the force of NOU. This particular final E is in hiero-
1907	glyphies very much confined to masculine words.
1908	16 Probably ABUNDANCE; R, SH,A, PELY; if we are right in
1909	giving to the second letter the force of SH, which we gave it in
1910	the name of Euergetes, No. 1,31.
1911	17 GreaT, the adjective following its substantive. See No. 5, 2,
1912	where this word was in the plural form, and No. 4, 2, where it
1913	was in the feminine.
1914	18 Probably NEcEssaRIes, or things fit; SIOT, N; COYTEN,
1915	with S,N, the plural termination, as at No. 4,7. The star may
1916	be CIwt, the dog-star, and the first two characters are inter-
1917	changeable with No. 4, 17. Voc. 1703. It is not usual for a
1918	seulptor to use such ornamental characters as the S,N, of this
1919	word for the unimportant grammatical termination. But it is
1920	frequent throughout this tablet.
1921	19 Possibly WHEN BEHOLD; A,S,K; ICXE, literally, Behold if.
1922	See No. 7,30, and No, 20, 27.
1923	20 He; P,E; TH; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4, 37.
1924	21 Possibly SUPPLIED, or, according to the Greek, Took care. See
1925	No. 9, 3, where, with the addition of an R for sps, to do, it may
1926	be rendered Fed. Possibly from the word a&wp, treasures,
1927	grain.
1928	22 YEARLY; T,R,B,R,E, which is the Coptic word ETE2aeers,
1929	or єтєpolenI, the B being used for een; and followed by pH.
1930	the sun, which is no more than the D.S. for time of No.1,1.
1931	See No. 15, 27 for this word, and No. 15, 8, for pH, used fur
1932	Time. With this use of B for MP we may compare that of
p. 88
1933	40 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 5.
1934	NT for D, in the case of Darius spelt NTARIUS. Here is
1935	well shown the uncertainty which hangs over the meaning of
1936	hieroglyphics when they are not followed by a D.S. In Egypt:
1937	Incrip. pl. 28, is a procession of men, each carrying a palm-branch,
1938	and the name of the branch is spelt with the first characters in this
1939	word yearly, T,R, for owpl, a branch, and the next character
1940	for its D.S. See Voc. 485.
1941	23 All. See No. 5, 9, where this word has a final T. See also
1942	No. 29,33.
1943	14 THE; as No. 5,20.
1944	25 OTHER THINGS; as No. 3,5.
1945	26 THE BULL APIs; H,A,P, followed by the D.S.
1946	27 THe BULL MnEvIs; E, for E&E, a bull, followed by CH, R,
1947	Xwpi, great. Its more usual name, Muevis, is a Greek corrup-
1948	tion of Amun-ebe. Voc. 65.
1949	28 AND; as No. 1, 28, and 30.
1950	29 ANImals, is required by the Greek. The finger THB, with
1951	E,O, plural, may be TRrroorE, an animal.
1952	30 Temples, the building, with the word God upon it.
1953	31 HE REGULATED; it is so translated on the Rosetta Stone.
1954	Without the first character this is the word Steersmun, written
1955	over the man in some seulptures. Voc. 1748 and 1746.
1956	32 IN; or For; see No. 5, 3, and 6, 26.
1957	33 CIrIes; B,K, Baks, but witbout the D.S. or the sign of the
1958	plural; as No. 18,9.
1959	34 EGYPr; Voc. 798. From the eyebrow, and eyelids blackened
1960	with paint, according to the custom of the Egyptian ladies, we
1961	get the word Xaue, black, which represents XHees, Egypt.
1962	The tear-drops may be caused from the pain which accompanied
1963	the operation of painting. The word is followed by the D.S. of
1964	a city, strietly speaking, but often used for a country.
1965	35 GIFts. The pyramid in the hand is TaX, a hill, and represents
1966	THI, to give, while the whole is symbolical of the act of giving.
1967	It is followed by S,N, the plural termination.
1968	36 OTHER, Or VARIOUs; see No. 3, 5, and 5, 25. The adjective
1969	following its substantive.
p. 89
1970	LINE 5.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 41
1971	37 GREAT, in the plural; the adjective following the substantive.
1972	See No. 5, 2.
1973	38 Perhaps ExCELLENT; S,P,T, CaNT. If this is an adjective, it
1974	precedes its substantive.
1975	39 GIFT. The hill Täy, as held in the hand at No. 5, 35.
1976	40 REVEnues may be the meaning of this word, which differs
1977	from No. 5, 1, in being followed by an arm, which is not in the
1978	act of giving, but is the same as that used in the words Received,
1979	No. 3,26, and Captured, No. 6, 5.
1980	Line 6.
1981	I AND; A,O, aWS, as No. 2, 3. These characters, at No. 5,
1982	22, and often elsewhere, we read as o8, the indefinite article;
1983	but here, before a verb, that article would be out of place.
1984	2 That be MIGHT MAKE; I,T, RO, eopo. The € is the prefix
1985	of the subjunctive mood to the word opo. The mouth po, is
1986	either R, or RO.
1987	3 RECONQUEST; E,M,K,R,O, plural, S,N; from XpO, to conquer.
1988	The EM is the prefix of the noun's case. The SN is a very
1989	unnecessary second plural termination, or rather, should have been
1990	placed before the three dots. See No. 10, 29, and 10, 41, where
1991	we also have this peculiarity. Note the difference between the K
1992	in this word and the N in No. 6, 30.
1993	4 SACRED IMAGEs, so translated at No. 34, 3. It is formed of
1994	the hatchet for Sacred, see God, No. 5, 15; the systrum, the
1995	musical instrument used by the priestesses, and the D.S. of the
1996	statues.
1997	5_CAPTURED; T,A,N, TWOYN, to carry off. The two legs are
1998	introduced to represent the action symbolically, see No. 6, 14;
1999	and the arm, the vowel, may have been chosen out of a variety of
2000	forms for the same reason; see No. 3, 26.
2001	6 BARBARIANs, may be the meaning given to the rude figure here
2002	used as the D.S. The letters are A,S, ACyE, a multitude.
2003	7 OF; as No. 5,5.
2004	8 PErSIA; P,R,S,T,T, with D.S. of land. See No. 6, 17, for
2005	the same D.S. See the same S in Dius, No. 3, 13.
2006	9 He MADE WAR; R,R, MAS; E&PHS, to make war, resçye,
p. 90
2007	42 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 6.
2008	battle. The unfledged bird is llac, which gives us the sound
2009	required. See No. 7, 4. In this case the R,R, of the Hierogly-
2010	phies represent the Coptie HR; as in Greek, where of the two
2011	R's the former carries the aspirate.
2012	10 Possibly ON BEHALE OF. But this is doubtful. See, however,
2013	No. 7,5, where we can give it the same meaning.
2014	11 CITTES; as No. 5, 33.
2015	12 EGYPT; as No. 5, 34.
2016	13 With GOOD FORTUNE. See No. 6, 31, and I1, IO, where we
2017	safely give it this meaning. On the Rosetta Stone it is translated
2018	Power; Voc. 1451. But Good fortune will be seen to be its more
2019	literal rendering. It seems to be a compound character. The
2020	upright part may be I, see No. 13, 2; the lower part is an A;
2021	the line across it may be an O, see No. 13, 13; and the whole
2022	may be from TãOrO, to send, to produce; to fall down, to cast
2023	down, which approaches our word Accident, and Fortune.
2024	14 Perhaps PLUNDErED, or perhaps plundering; A,T,N, from
2025	inl, to bring, with I, the feminine article, as the nominative case
2026	to this verb ends with a I, and may very possibly be of the femi-
2027	nine gender. The form of the I may be chosen to represent
2028	motion.
2029	15 HIs MAJESTY, as No. 3, 18, being the nominative to the fore-
2030	going verb. The first character we have seen as part of the word
2031	Reign, No. 1, 11. The bird is the word orpo, king. The perch,
2032	T, makes it probable that the noun is feminine; it changes the
2033	word King into Majesty; and we see it in the more lengthened
2034	word rerTepo, kingdom, which in Coptie is a feminine noun.
2035	The perch is chosen for a T, as a suitable character to accompany
2036	the bird.
2037	16 Possibly, The FIELDS of OTHER LANDs. The first character is
2038	the moon, 102; it may represent 102s, the fields. It is followed
2039	by TO, K,E; eo, the world, and KE, foreign, or other.
2040	17 FOREIGN COUNTRIEs. The first character is of doubtful force.
2041	It is the ornamental collar of No. 3, 2. If it is Mealakh,
2042	a collar, it may be used to represent the two words eeai, a place,
2043	and KE, foreign. The last character is the usual D.S. for a
2044	country.
p. 91
2045	LINE 6.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 43
2046	18 FoR or unto, as No. 1, 8, and 5, 14.
2047	19 The CONSPICUOUs GLORY. E,O, is EOOr, glory; the sitting
2048	figure, bolding an ornament on the head, is translated conspicuous
2049	at No. 37, 18; the S which follows it is the sign of the feminine,
2050	prefixed in Coptic, but here postfixed to the adjective; and the
2051	plural sign treats the whole as one word.
2052	20 The PROSPERITY; N,N,F, with S plural, where we should look
2053	for S,N, plural; from ranec, good.
2054	21 Of the country, as No. 1, 10, and 5, 6, but preceded by the
2055	indefinite article, where the definite seems wanted, as Egypt is
2056	the country meant. See the article at No. 5, 22.
2057	22 He GAVE; R,T,I. From THI, a gift, with I the feminine
2058	article postfixed, and preceded by sps, to do, which makes the
2059	substantive into a verb.
2060	23 THEM; N,F,S, plural, where as in No. 6, 20, we should
2061	have looked for S,N, plural. From racl, to him, made into to
2062	them by the plural signs.
2063	24 UNIo; R, a preposition as No. A, 8; borrowed, as may be
2064	supposed, from the Hebrew.
2065	25 PALACEs, or houses with a throne; the throne, the letter T the
2066	feminine article, the D.S. for a house, and S,N, for the plural.
2067	26 OF; M; el, the sign of the genitive case, as at No. 3, 23.
2068	27 The TEMPLes; as No. 2,18.
2069	28 WHICH HAD BEEN BOBBED; M,N,M,N,T, with S,N, for the
2070	plural; from èèreonT, not having.
2071	29 Perhaps, WHo or THEx; A,M; Z&N, QEN, or sometimes spelt
2072	¿ell, the plural article. See No. 15, 2, and 15, 36, where this
2073	word takes a plural termination, in the last of which places its
2074	meaning seems pretty well fixed by the Greek.
2075	30 HAVING MADE IO SPRING UP, Or having added; N,k; R, TE.
2076	From pHT, to spring up, preceded by Mepe, the prefix for the im-
2077	perfect tense of the verb. See No. 14, 35, and 36, and No. 22,
2078	18, where the verb has a different prefix. We must distinguish
2079	between our first letter, an N, and the K in the name of Berenice;
2080	though in several places in this inscription the distinction is lost,
2081	by the filling up of the hollow in the carving.
p. 92
2082	44 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. LLINE 6.
2083	31 GOOD FORTUNE, as No. 6, 13; but here preceded by S, as
2084	No. 10, 15; for which the reason is not obvious.
2085	32 Jox; O,N,F; orwog.
2086	33 EGyPT; K,M, with I the feminine article, and the D.S. for a
2087	country. See No. 8, 31, and 32, where these letters, though of
2088	a different form, are used in the two words of the same meaning.
2089	34 Prohably, REJOTCING. The flower &ДHДI may represent
2090	OrZEAAE, a song. The R may be sps, to do, which makes the
2091	substantive into a verb.
2092	Line 7.
2093	1 PRAIses; A,A,A,A; dlal, to magnify: see No. 24, 28, where
2094	the word is in a more simple form; also Voc. 372 and 1449.
2095	2 HE; as No. 5, 10.
2096	3 FougHr; the two arms of a warrior, with sword and shield in
2097	his hands. Voc. 1777.
2098	4 MADE WAR; as No. 6, 9.
2099	5 Perhaps, ON nEHALF OF, as conjectured at No. 6, 10. But
2100	here our unknown word has a plural termination, SM, instead of
2101	the more used SN. See No. 18, 12, and 32, 3, for other cases
2102	of such termination. The change between M and N if frequent.
2103	Our first letter does not seem to be the sanie as the S of
2104	No. 9,21.
2105	6 The BUrIAL PLAces, Literally, Amenti, the supposed place of
2106	the dead; A,M,N,T,T, with D.S. of country.
2107	7 TнE; P, лe; see No. 5, 24, where, however, the P is followed
2108	by the vowel.
2109	8 HATED ONES; R,B,T; BWTE, hated, preceded by some part
2110	of the verb sps, to do. The second character is often used as a P,
2111	or B, in the word Anubis; Voc. 139.
2112	9 AND; see No. 1, 28.
2113	10 LANDs; the D.S. of No. 6, 17, repeated three times.
2114	I1 BARBARIANs; the D.S. of No. 6, 6. In these cases the
2115	sculptor shortens his work by omitting either the letter or the
2116	D.S. when the word occurs a second time.
2117	12 Probably, NumErous; see No. 10, 8, where it will bear the
p. 93
2118	LINE 7.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 45
2119	same meaning. A reptile from weyt, to creep, may give us the
2120	word wcy, numerous.
2121	13 He cuт oFF; T,R, from Twpe, an axe. But see No. 18, 8,
2122	where these letters mean THp, All.
2123	• 14 HEADs; represented pictorially, and repeated three times for
2124	the plural.
2125	15 The BaRBarlans; the D.S. as at No. 7, 11, followed by three
2126	dots, and S,N, the double plural termination. There are places
2127	in this inscription where these letters S,N, might be supposed to
2128	be the pronoun Their; but in such cases as this, and No. 8,2,
2129	No. 9, 4, and otbers, such a meaning is unallowable.
2130	16 THOSE WHO GOVERN IHEM, is required by the Greek,
2131	CH, R,P,,S,N, plural. The first two characters are xwps,
2132	powerful; the fourth is doubtful.
2133	17 Just laws; being the plural of No. 4, 17.
2134	18 He; the article for the pronoun, as No. 7, 2.
2135	19 UPHELD, is required by the Greek, but the fourth character is
2136	doubtful. The word may perhaps be O,H,A; 02I, to uphold,
2137	with the D.S. of a support of sone kind.
2138	20 The INHABITANTs, literally, the living men and women; the
2139	character for Life; see No..1, 15, followed by the D.S. The
2140	woman is known from the man in this iuscription by the orna-
2141	ment on her head; see No. 2, 4. Whenever throughout this
2142	decree the Greek writer wrote the word Inhabitants, or spoke of
2143	the people in general terms, the Egyptian scribe changed it into
2144	Men and Women; thus showing in the clearest way the higher
2145	rank that the women held in Egypt, compared with their sisters
2146	in Greece.
2147	21 ALl; as at No. 5, 9, the adjective to the foregoing noun.
2148	22 Or or belonging to; see No. 5,5, and 11, 17.
2149	23 THE coUNTrY, meaning, as it would seem, Egypt. But compare
2150	No. 6,17.
2151	24 AND, as at No. 1, 30.
2152	25 OTHER LANDS, as No. 6, 16.
2153	26 MEN and WoMEN; the D.S. of No.7, 20.
2154	27 ALL, as No. 7,21.
p. 94
2155	46 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE7.
2156	28 UNDER; M,N,H,I, CH,N, which seems to be compounded of
2157	the prepositions eeeN, with, and DaxeN, before. Compare
2158	No. 32, 4 and 5.
2159	29 DoMINIoN; the plural of the word rendered Majesty at
2160	No. 3,18, and 27. Here, as might be expected, we have not got
2161	= the pronoun His.
2162	30 BEHOLD, WHEN; as No. 5, 19.
2163	31 IT CAME IO PASS; R,E,F; from sps, to do, the auxiliary verb
2164	of action. REF is very exactly Ec/ips, it was done, with the
2165	pronoun F at the end of the word, as is usual in the hieroglyphies,
2166	not at the beginning, where it is placed in Coptic. See No. 13,45,
2167	and 22,5, where the same word is spelt rather differently.
2168	32 UPon; H,R, E&PAI; as at No. 13, 22, and 24, 31. In
2169	other inscriptions these two letters are sometimes the name of the
2170	god Horus; see Voc. 119; and the first letter, when repeated,
2171	forms the word oo, the world, in the place of the second letter in
2172	our word No. 23, 37; see Voc. 705. Our preposition is derived
2173	from 2pd, the face, which in Coptic forms part of a variety of
2174	prepositions, as do the words Hand, Head, and Mouth. The
2175	force of the letters is well proved when they occur joined with
2176	others; as No. 10, 33, Na &Pa, Hereafter; No. 11, 38, and 12, I,
2177	ZIpeN, For; No. 15, 33, ¿Ipele, Before, and No. 12, 40,
2178	and 15, 40, ca2pe, Upon, Within. No. 8, 12, and 22, 3 can
2179	be better understood as Event, being the substantive &pd, a
2180	face.
2181	33 YEAR, of the seasons ; sviauros, not eros, the civil year, No. 1, 1.
2182	See No. 15, 29.
2183	34 OF, see No. 1,8, and 5, 14.
2184	35 THE NiLe; H,A,P, MO. The last syllable is eooy, water.
2185	HAP, though more usually HAM, is a prefix by which Norß,
2186	gold, becomes Zaeerrorß, and ZanNOrß, a goldsmith ; cye,
2187	wood, becomes ¿alęcye, a carpenter; so our word Hap-mou,
2188	means a Waterman. Voc. 183. See No. 8, 29.
2189	36 It FAILED; N,T,S, CH,M; STE, the prefix of the verb, and
2190	CàDEll, to fail, or, as the Greek says, to rise insufficiently.
p. 95
2191	EXPIANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 47
2192	Line 8.
2193	1 DAY; E,A,O; €200%. See No. 13, 13, where this word is
2194	written with two letters, and No. 13, 46, where it has ouly one
2195	letter; but the less careful spelling is supplied in those cases by
2196	the addition of the D.S.
2197	2 SEAsONS, or times. The meaning of this word is fixed very
2198	satisfactorily by No. 8, 23, and the first letter we treated as a P,
2199	oi B, at No. 7,8, and 23, 12. It may be Al time, a word which
2200	we find in anac, old, compounded of dC, old; and also in
2201	aпрнте, long ago, compounded of PHT, to rise, or raise. It
2202	is followed by the ring, the D.S. of time, as at No. 1, 1, and 3;
2203	and then by S,N, the plural termination.
2204	3 RIGHT; see No. 7, 17, Justice; and No. A, 17, Decree.
2205	4 THE INHABITANIs. See No. 7, 20.
2206	5 ALu, the adjective following its substantive. See No. 7, 21.
2207	6 OF, see No. 7, 22, and 5, 5.
2208	7 CIrIES; B,K; Bakl, with the usual D.S. Voc. 813. See
2209	No. 6, 11.
2210	8 THosE; N,E; sr, the plural definite article, followed by S,N,
2211	as the plural termination. See No. 20, 8, where we give a very diffe-
2212	rent meaning to a similar word. But as the N is there a different
2213	character, it probably carried with it a different vowel's sound.
2214	9 STRUCE DOWN. At No. 5, 8, we have seen reason for thinking
2215	this character bas the force of CHEM. Here the Greek requires
2216	STRUCK DOWN, for which we find in Coptic Doмфeме, the half
2217	of which reduplicate word will very well satisfy our requirements,
2218	both as to sound and as to meaning, and particularly if we may
2219	join that half to the next word, and thus make a reduplicate word
2220	of our own. Such compound words are so far common in Coptic,
2221	as to make our conjecture not unreasonable.
2222	10 CAST DOWN; N, CH; NEX.
2223	1l THE. See No. 5, 24, and No. 9, 6.
2224	12 EvENt, as No. 22, 3; H,R; &pa, face, a word used as part
2225	of the prepositions EZPa, against, and sra&pa, upon, and thus
2226	itself is the object towards which or from which motion is directed.
2227	See No. 7, 32, where the use of this word is explained.
p. 96
2228	48 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. LLINE 8.
2229	13 WHEN BEHOLD, is the rendering that we gaye to this word at
2230	No. 7, 30.
2231	14 M, the prefix of the infinitive mood, to the next word. See
2232	No. 18, 20, and No. 18, 25.
2233	15 The HAPPeNING; S, CH,N. This word seems to be akin to
2234	CaDEle, to fail. See No. 7, 36, where the characters are different,
2235	and it ends with M, not N. In many languages an accident, and
2236	fortune, are ambiguous words, and mean either good or bad. See
2237	No. 8,27, and 13, 23 for other places where this word is used..
2238	16 By Fortune, or by accident. This word is on the Rosetta
2239	Stone translated Good fortune. Voc. 157. It has the same
2240	ambiguity as the last word. See No. 13, 24. See also No.
2241	30, 19, where this character bears its original meaning of Iwo
2242	arms holding, and where a possible explanation is offered for its
2243	secondary meaning in this place.
2244	17 EvIu; CH, F,I,D; xwgl; the adjective to the foregoing
2245	substantive. Compare No. 26, 20, Avenger, or Next of kin.
2246	18 HAVING READ; S, SH,A,O; CDAI, writiny; followed by a man
2247	with his hand to his mouth for the act of speaking, for the word
2248	pw, mouth, and then by S,N, to put the whole into the plural.
2249	We may compare this with the Hebrew, in which the word for
2250	Reading, means to liead aloud, namely, N9p, to call out. Our
2251	word means to speak the writing.
2252	19 DEstructIoNs; CH, R,I, followed by D.S. of men thrown
2253	down. From xwps, powerful. With the adverb after it we have
2254	in Coptic, XOP EBOS, destruction. The D.S. makes the adverb
2255	less necessary•
2256	20 Perbaps ONCE UPON A TIME; CH, P; XWT, hidden, like the
2257	Hebrew b3y, hidden, which has the same two meanings as the
2258	Latin Olim, formerly, and hereafter. See No. 21, 6, and 21, 49,
2259	where it bears the same meaning.
2260	21 HaPPIness; ERO, T,I; єporот. See No. 13, 48, where it
2261	has the same meaning. The four jars have their foree from their
2262	known contents, EpWTE, milk; and the I,I, seem not wanted.
2263	The second may be the feminine article. These jars form the
2264	first syllable of the well-known title of Osiris, Ro-t-amenti, king
p. 97
2265	LINE 8.] EXPLANATION OF ТHЕ HIEROGLYPHICS. 49
2266	of Amenti, which the Greeks wrote as Rhadamanthus. But see
2267	No. 25, 13, and No. 37, 24, where this same word is shown equally
2268	clearly to mean principal or of first rank. Such is the ambiguity
2269	attaching to this mode of writing, and which the scribes made no
2270	attempt to remove. The reason why they rested satisfied is pretty
2271	clear. They never meant to employ it on subjeets requiring
2272	logical exactness.
2273	22 BEFalten; M,R,K; from PEK, to bow down, with el, the prefix
2274	of the infinitive mood; as No. 8, 14.
2275	23 TImE; see No. 8,2, where this word is in the plural.
2276	24 KINGS OF UPPEr EGYPT. See No. 1, 12, where we have the
2277	double title. The figure wears the crown of the Upper Province.
2278	See No. 3, 11. Very possibly the native sovereigns, the Kings of
2279	Thebes, are here more particularly pointed to.
2280	25 CHIErs; A,P,A, with the plural sign; ane, head.
2281	26 UPoN; as No. 7, 32, although the order of the letters is
2282	reversed. But in the case of H,R, with no vowel between them,
2283	the change of place of the two letters cannot be very important
2284	to the second. In the Greek we have sø' wv, meaning Under
2285	whom, but here we have no pronoun. See No. 8, 12, where we
2286	render it An event.
2287	27 It HAPPENED. See No. 8,15.
2288	28 By FORTUNE, OF ACCIDENT; see No. 8, 16.
2289	29 THo NILe; see No. 7, 35.
2290	30 FAILED, Or ROSE INSUPFICIENTLY. See No. 7, 36, where this
2291	group ends with an M, not N, but is in every other respect
2292	written with the same characters. This connects the word
2293	No. 7, 36, with No. 8, 15, in which the characters employed
2294	are so different.
2295	31,32 THE EGYPTIANS, OF THI COUNTRY. See No. 1, 9, and
2296	10, where these two words are thus united. Also Voc. 776.
2297	33 IN; M; as No. 17, 3. See No. 5, 3, where a different form
2298	of the letter is used.
2299	34 Day; as No. 8, 1, though it wants the final vowel.
2300	35 SEASONS; as No. 8,2.
2301	36 AND; as No. 2,3, and 6, 1.
2302	E
p. 98
2303	50 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LING 8.
2304	37 HIs MaJEsTY; as No. 3, 27.
2305	38 MAY HE BE PRAISED; H,S,F; 2wc, to celebrate, followed by
2306	9, in Coptic the prefix for the third person singular of the verb.
2307	See the use of the Cf at No. 13, 45.
2308	39 AND; see No. 1, 28.
2309	40 SISTER; S,N,E; literally Brother; for we must not compare
2310	it to CoMl, Sister, for want of the feminine termination. See
2311	No. 4, 34. The feminine termination is supplied by the D.S.
2312	Line 9.
2313	1 D.S. for the queen and king; the usual order of the two
2314	being reversed. See No. 2,4, for the D.S. of a woman.
2315	2 Ha; the artiele used for the pronoun, as No. 5, 10. And
2316	here, as there, the pronoun in the singular is used for the two
2317	sovereigns.
2318	3 Probably EeD; see No. 5, 21; where, bowever, we bave
2319	rendered these two words, The food.
2320	4 THosE; N,E, with S,N, for the plural. See No. 8,8, where
2321	this word is written with an N of a different form.
2322	WHO BURN INCENSE; M, SH, followed by the pot of incense
2323	with a flame rising from it. The M is the prefix which makes
2324	the verb into a participle. SH represents the compound word
2325	wyorryworeys, to burn incense. See the force of the SH at
2326	No. 1, 31.
2327	6 THe, as No. 8, 11.
2328	7 EGYPTIAN, used as a plural adjective ; see No. 1,9, and 8, 31.
2329	8 TEMPLes, or Divine houses. The word God is used as an
2330	adjective; see No. 12, 11 ; the D.S. for House, as at No. 28, 34,
2331	is repeated three times.
2332	9 LIREWISE; see No. 4, 31.
2333	10 VARIous, or Other; CH, plural; KOOS. But see No. 1,9,
2334	where it is a contraction of XHees, No. 8, 31.
2335	11 CITTEs; as No. 5, 33.
2336	12 EGreT; as No. 6, 12.
2337	13 Probably Trmes. It may be the rord orrrwors, hours.
2338	See No. 12, 16, and 13, 7, which support this meaning to the
2339	word. But the force of the third letter is uncertain.
p. 99
2340	LINE 9.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 51
2341	14 APPOINTED; being the word translated Just Laws at No. 7,17,
2342	but with different form of the S,N, the plural termination.
2343	15 Hl; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4, 37.
2344	16 REMITTED; according to the Greek; S,A,?,0, followed by the
2345	man with hand to his mouth, RO, possibly some part of the
2346	auxiliary verb sps, to do. See No. 11, 40, and Voc. for this form
2347	of the S. It may be C&&W, to make to cease; but the force of
2348	the third letter is uncertain.
2349	17 NUMEroUs, as No. 7, 12.
2350	18 Probably SEED, meaning the tax on corn taken in kind;
2351	CH, A; XO, seed, or Xd, to sow.
2352	19 HE; as No. 9, 15.
2353	20 Gave; R,T,T; TT is one form of the verb THs, to give;
2354	the R is part of the auxiliary verb sps. The pyramid in the
2355	band is the letter I, as No. 5, 39. Compare Gifts, No. 5, 35. 'The
2356	arm is symbolical of the action. This may also mean He remitted.
2357	21 THOUsANDs, or HUNDBEDs; S, with the plural termination
2358	S,N; LyE, a hundred, or CyO, a thousand.
2359	22 Perbaps NECESSARIES. First we bave A,O, the indefinite
2360	article Os; then H,T,R, &TOP, necessary. But the following
2361	characters, which form the word Years, and Palm branches, do
2362	not well agree with this. See No. 1, 1, year, and No. 5,22,
2363	yearly, which both resemble this group of letters. The fruit of
2364	the palm tree was not so abundant, as likely to be here mentioned
2365	23 ExPENcEs, as No. 5, 40.
2366	24 For; the preposition, as No. 1, 8, and 13, 40.
2367	25 The GOOD; N,E,N; saNE.
2368	26 WELFARE. The second character is Life, as No. 1, 15. The
2369	- bird may be the fabulous phoenix.
2370	27 Of MEN and Women; the D.S. followed by three dots for the
2371	plural.
2372	28 Probably EacH, or singly; A,0, with S,N, for the plural;
2373	perhaps OYA, SINGLE. See No. 23, 20.
2374	29 He; the article for the pronoun, as No. 9, 2.
2375	30 Gave; being the saine as No. 9,20, but witbout the arm.
2376	31 Probably WHEAT, agreeably to the Greek, more literally Good
2377	E 2
p. 100
2378	52 EXPLANATION OF THE HICROGLYPHICS. [LINE 9.
2379	corn; N,N,O, for MANOs, good; T perhaps the feminine article,
2380	and the plow as the D.S. with the plural sign.
2381	32 To EGyet, as No. 6, 33, preceded by the indetinite article.
2382	33 Fron; M, el, the sign of the genitive case, as 3, 23, and 5, 3.
2383	34 The SYrIaNs, according to the Greek; R,T,N,N,O, with T,T,
2384	and the D.S. for Land. The Rotenno are often mentioned in the
2385	inscriptions relating to the Egyptian wars.
2386	35 Some unknown Crty, which may qualify the preceding word;
2387	as it is not probable that whenever the Rotenno are mentioned
2388	Syrians are meant. It was, perhaps, one of the ports on the
2389	Syrian coast. Our first letter is used at No. 26, 18, where its
2390	force is equally uncertain. The other letters are B,T,K, for BaKs,
2391	city, with T the feninine article placed before the last letter of
2392	the word, as is not unusual.
2393	36 FRom; as No. 9, 33.
2394	37 The LAND; T,0, as at No. 6, 16, and the first part of No. 1,10,
2395	though with a different form of the vowel.
2396	38 OF; as No. I, 8.
2397	39 CaPHIoR, in the Greek, Phenicia. This was the land of the
2398	Philistines, called the Caphtorites in Deuteronomy ii., 23; but it
2399	is not the island of Caphtor spoken of in Jeremiah xlvii., 4, from
2400	which the Philistines came forth, as also is said in Genesis x., 14.
2401	That was probably one of the large islands on the east side of the
2402	Delta, in the fork of two branches of the Nile. It is spelt K,F,T,
2403	followed I,1, and the D.S. for a country.
2404	40 From; as No. 9, 33, but with a different form of the M.
2405	41 The FOREIGN ISLAND. The D.S. of an island is followed by the
2406	adjective K,E; KE foreign. See No. 6, 16.
2407	42 OF; N,T; STE. For the force of the two legs as T, see
2408	No. 10, 12; also No. 6,28.
2409	43 CYPrUs, according to the Greek; B,A,A,N,A,A; Besrre,
2410	a palm tree, in Greek Phonix, whence its inhabitants, as also those
2411	of the neighbouring country, were named Phenicians. The force
2412	of the T,T, before the D.S. for Land, is doubtful. See No. 9, 34,
2413	and 39.
2414	44 WHICH; NTE; NTE, ST, or NET.
p. 101
2415	LINE 10.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 53
2416	45 IN; the same preposition and character as No. 9, 40, there
2417	translated From.
2418	46 The name, as it would seem, of the Mediterranean Sea. But the
2419	meaning is very doubtful.
2420	Line 10.
2421	The GREAT SEA; CH, probably for xups, great; and M, for
2422	eewos, water. In Isaiah, xxii., 3, the Mediterranean is called
2423	the Great Waters.
2424	2 LIKEWISE, as No. 4,31.
2425	3 CoUNTrIEs; the D.S. of No. 9, 34, followed by I, and the
2426	plural sign.
2427	4 GrEAt; in the plural, to agree with the foregoing. See
2428	No.5,2.
2429	5 HE; the article for the pronoun, as No. 4,37, and 9, 29.
2430	6 GAVE; as No. 9,30.
2431	7 SILVER VESSELS. The first character may he ZAT, silver.
2432	The second is the D.S. In the Rosetta Stone, line 4, these two
2433	characters are united.
2434	8 NUMErOUS, as No. 7, 12.
2435	9 The indefinite article, as at No.9,22, and 9,32.
2436	10 The Greek does not help us to the meaning of this plural
2437	substantive, of which the first character is unknown.
2438	I1 Leess, the common food of the country; T,S, ISI; THG, a
2439	plant, and HOE, a leak. The throne, in Coptic 2ElrcI, is softened
2440	into ISI, as we see in the name of the goddess Isis. The resem-
2441	blance in sound, between the nanie of the goddess and the leek,
2442	made the leek a sacred plant. See Juvenal, who was told that
2443	Egyptians might not eat it:-
2444	Porrum et cepe nefas violare, ac frangere morsu.
2445	O sanctas gentes, quibus bæc nascuntur in hortis
2446	Numina. SAT. XT. 9-11.
2447	12 SEEn or grain; S,T, CAT, preceded by the indefinite article, os.
2448	13 SPELT; B,A,T, plural; BWT, spelt; or at least the grain
2449	mentioned in Exodus ix., 32, whatever its name may have heen.
2450	THE, the article, as No. 5, 24.
2451	15 GOOD FORTUNE; as No. 6, 31. See No. 6, 13, and 11, 10,
2452	where this word has not the prefix S.
p. 102
2453	54 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 10.
2454	16 Of the INHABITANIs; as No. 7, 20; literally, living men ana
2455	women.
2456	17 DECREE; see No. 4, 17; but here the Greek does not help us,
2457	and there are four words to which we can give no exact mcaning,
2458	except by supposing that they are out of place.
2459	18 Prom; the preposition M, el, as No. 9, 36.
2460	19 The IAND, as No. 9,37, and 7, 25.
2461	20 Some Ciry or country; but for this and the three preceding
2462	words we have nothing in the Greek.
2463	21 He; the article for the pronoun, as No. 10, 5.
2464	22 GAVE; as No. 10, 6; but meaning, according to the Greek, he
2465	left behind him.
2466	23 FAME; R, CH,O, with S,N, for the plural; XW, to talk, with
2467	the auxiliary sps, to act. See Prophet, or Speaker, No. 3, 4.
2468	24 WITROUT END; M,N, CH; reeer xw.
2469	25 Of BENEVOLENCE; being the word used in the king's name
2470	Euergetes, with S,N, for the plural. The letter is SH, for cyay,
2471	benevolence.
2472	26 FoR or UNTO; R,R,E,A; E&PHI, unto. Here we have a double
2473	R, for HR, as in No. 6,9, &c.
2474	27 EvER; as No. 1,16.
2475	28 LIKEWIsE; as No. 4, 3l.
2476	29 THEY WILL TALK; S,P, CH, three dots, and S,N, for the plural,
2477	perhaps from TEXE, to say, preceded by S, which may be the future
2478	sign. In Coptic, Cra is the prefix for the future, and we have no
2479	authority to treat S alone as such; but we shall see so many cases
2480	in this inscription in which it is so used, as quite to justify our so
2481	trcating it.
2482	30 REVENUES, or expence; as No. 5, 40.
2483	31 Among, or to; as No. 4, 13, and 16, 31. But here, in the
2484	Vienna copy, the character is reversed, as it would seem, in mis-
2485	take. It may be corrected by the help of Dr. Lepsius's copy.
2486	32 THE, the article, as No. 5, 24, and 10, 14.
2487	33 HEREAFTER, is required by the Greek; N,H,R, probably
2488	raapa, upon. See No. 7, 32, for the force of the second letter,
2489	and an explanation of the word.
p. 103
2490	LINE 10.J DXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 55
2491	• MEN AND WOMEN, as No. 7, 26.
2492	35 AND, as No. 8, 39, &tc.
2493	36 SO MANY IHINGS; A,P,E,S, with S,N, for the plural; anc,
2494	a number, and in the plural, so many. In the Greek we have,
2495	"In return for which."
2496	37 A GIFT; see Gave, No. 10, 22, &c.
2497	38 From; see Of, No. 1, 8, &c.
2498	39 The Gods; as No. 5, 15. Such is the obscurity of this mode
2499	of writing, that we might have rendered this, "A gift to the
2500	gods," if the Greek had not cleared up the doubt.
2501	40 ESTABLISHED; S,M,N,T; CresTT. See No. 13, 2, for the
2502	letter T. But also see No. 20, 39, where the saune letters, vary-
2503	ing only in the form of the S, must be read as SHALL NOT HAVE.
2504	41 The HIGH OFFIce; A, HOR,O,?,T, three dots, and S,N, for the
2505	plural. The bird is not A, but HOR, as at No. 3, 27. The
2506	unknown character and the T represent the Coptic prefix, MEO,
2507	which is here postfixed. It makes a concrete noun into an
2508	abstract; as on the Rosetta Stone it makes King into Kingdom.
2509	Voc. 623; and Priest into Priesthood, Voc. 355. In Coptic, how-
2510	ever, it precedes the word. Our word here may be lcoorpo,
2511	and might be rendered Kingship; at No. 12, 27, it means an
2512	Office of a lower rank. The custom of giving the royal titles to
2513	the chief priest in every temple, had lowered the meaning of these
2514	titles.
2515	42 OF; as No. 3, 17.
2516	43 RulEr or King; see Queen, No. 4, 32. As the second letter is
2517	K, we may conjecture that the first is HY; and then with the
2518	help of yooc, a shepherd, we get Manetho's name for the
2519	Shepherd-kings, Hyk-sos. But the word HYK, for King, is not
2520	found in Coptic.
2521	41 UPPER AND LowEr EGYPI, distinguished by two flowers; the
2522	lily for Upper Egypt shows several flower-leaves; the papyrus for
2523	Lower Egypt resembles a bell with a single-flower leaf.
2524	45 WITH; as No. 3, 23, where it is rendered of.
2525	46 CHILDREN. From the joint of meat, Dpe, we get Dpot,
2526	children, and çунре, a son. This character is used in the first
p. 104
2527	56 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 11.
2528	name of this Ptolemy, and also in that of the next, for the word
2529	Sun. Voc. 1806. See also No. 15, 21, for the use of tbis
2530	character.
2531	Line I1.
2532	1 Probably HIs own. N,O,O. The reed we have conjectured
2533	in Voc. 658, to have the force of OU, which would make this
2534	word soros, his own; as No. 33, 15. Ibis reed, with a pair
2535	of leaves, should not be mistaken for the twig with four leaves,
2536	at No. 1, 12, which is an S. See also No. 26, 26, for the further
2537	use of this character. '
2538	2 AND; as No. 1, 28.
2539	Poor PEOPLe, meaning, perhaps; Labourers, or Dependants;
2540	F,K,A,O,O, with S,N, for the plural; фНКЕ or фиKe, poor.
2541	The meaning is supported by the mention of Servants, in the
2542	same sentence.
2543	4 WrTH, as No. 10, 45.
2544	5 SErvants; B,C,H, plural; BuK, a servant.
2545	6 UNTO, For; the preposition as No. 15, 37.
2546	7 TImEs; R,?,O, with S,N for the plural. The meaning is very
2547	well proved at No. 12,16, and 13, 7, and at No. 18, 12, and
2548	25,28, in which last two it is preceded by the same preposition.
2549	8 FOR, Or UNIO; as No. 10, 26.
2550	9 EvER; as No. 10, 27, and 1,16.
2551	10 With GOOD FORTUNE; as No. 6,13.
2552	=
2553	11 AND, as No. 11, 2.
2554	12 Probably CoNsIDErING; see No. 13, 28, where this meaning
2555	is also allowable. S,N,E,B, perhaps from MIßE to inspire.
2556	13 The REAsoN; R,T,E; pHTE. See No. 29, 43, where it is
2557	the auxiliary verb. It must not be mistaken for Give, No.
2558	9,20, where the hand holds a pyramid.
2559	14 Of SUCH THINGs; M,N,E, with S,N, for the plural. Or it
2560	might be taken as two words, M, the preposition Of, the other
2561	letters These things, as No. 9,4, &c.
2562	15 Perhaps THEY WERE LED, since, It seemed fit to, is what is
2563	required by the Greek; A,N; perhaps from EN, to lead, to
p. 105
2564	LINE 11.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 57
2565	bring. The nominative case follows the verb. Or perbaps that
2566	thought may be included in the foregoing words; and then this
2567	may be the preposition Unto, as No. 32, 30.
2568	16 Ihe PRIEsIs; as No. 1, 24.
2569	17 OF, Or BELONGING IO; as No. 5,5.
2570	18 The CoUNtRy; as No. I, 10, and 6, 21.
2571	19 FURTHER; A,O,S, CH,R; caOpHi, from below; preceded
2572	by the article o8. See No. 12, 7, and 12, 31, where it has
2573	ncarly the same meaning.
2574	20 TO PREPARE; as No. 5, 11.
2575	21 OTHER; as No.5,36, and 3, 5.
2576	22 DxPENCEs; as No. 5, 1. But bere we have an additional
2577	N, where it would seem we want eitber S,N, for the plural, or
2578	nothing. See No. 11, 36, for a similar error in the artist.
2579	23,24, KING, as No. 1, 12, and 13.
2580	25,26, 27, 28. PrOLIMY, LIVING fOr EVER, BELOVED by PTHAH,
2581	as No. 1, 14, &c.
2582	30 AND; as No. 1,28, &c.
2583	31 QUEEN; as No. 4, 32; but the word bere ends with T,S,
2584	the feminine termination, as does the queen's name.
2585	32 BERENICE; as No. 1, 33.
2586	33 The GODs DUERGETA; as No. 1, 31, and 4, 36.
2587	34 IN; as No. 5, 3, &c.
2588	35 An uncertain word, perhaps, indeed, a faulty drawing in the
2589	Vienna copy. The first character Dr. Lepsius has, bas an
2590	animal's bead; tben it becomes P,T; ПЕТЕ, which, or the.
2591	36 TEMPLES; as No. 2, 18, &c., but here ending with S, and
2592	tbrce dots, for the plural, in the same incorrect manner as No.
2593	11, 22, where we bad N, and three dots. In each case we ought
2594	to bave S,N, and three dots.
2595	37 AND; as No. 1,28, &c.
2596	38 For; H,R,N; 2IpeN, as No. 12, 1, and No. 23, 28. See
2597	No. 7, 32, for an explanation of the first two letters.
2598	39 The BROTHEr GODs, as No. 1, 29, and 4, 30.
2599	40 Their BURIED PARENTs; K,S,E,T, with S,N, for the plural;
2600	from KHC, to bury, and ICT, father. Ior the force of the S,
p. 106
2601	58 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 12.
2602	see No. 9, 16, and 34, 13. It is the first letter in the name of
2603	queen Scemiophra.
2604	41 LIKEWISE; as No. 4, 31, &C.
2605	Line 12.
2606	For; as No. 1l, 38.
2607	3 The SAVIOUR GODS, Or GODS SOTErEs. The adjective is CH;
2608	*; compare OrZas, safety, of which the first syllable is only
2609	the article. See No. 1,9; 8, 31, and 13,2, for the force of
2610	this letter.
2611	4 LAID ASIDE; S, CH,E; CKH.
2612	5 Perhaps THosE; the pronoun belonging to the foregoing
2613	adjective. Voc. 1261.
2614	6 THE; as No. 5, 24, &c.
2615	7 Persons BEYoND; S, CH,R, with S,N, for the plural;
2616	caDpHs, under or within. See No. 20, 35, where it more
2617	clearly means former.
2618	8 PRIESTs; as No. 1, 24, &c.
2619	9 EACH ONE; P,O; nora. The Greek has Each of the
2620	temples. See No. 14,33.
2621	10 EGYPTIAN; as No. 8, 31, &c.
2622	11 TEMPLEs; as No. 9,8; except that there the D.S. for house
2623	is repeated three times.
2624	12 AlL; as No. 8, 5, Stc.; the adjective to the foregoing sub-
2625	stantive.
2626	13 Or; as No. 5,5, &c.
2627	14 CITTES; as No. 5, 33, and 6, 11, &c.
2628	15 EGYPT; as No. 5, 34, and 6, 12, &c.
2629	16 HERBAFTEr, literally, TIMES, as No. 11, 7, &c.
2630	17 IN ADDITION, to add, to endeavour; H,T,T; 2I TOT, to
2631	place the hand, a word sometimes used as a verb, and sometimes,
2632	as it would seem, as au adverh, in addition. See No. 13, 15,
2633	and 36, 9. As at No. 12, 39, the artist, in the choice of his
2634	characters, takes one that is pictorially suitable.
2635	18 The PrIEsts; as No. 1,24, and 12, 8, &c.
2636	19 Of; as No. 5,5, and 12, 13, &c.
2637	20 The GODS EUErGETA, as No. I, 31, and I1, 33, &c.
p. 107
2638	LINE 12.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 59
2639	21 THE, as No. 12, 6, &c.
2640	22 NamEs. The ring within which a king's name is written,
2641	is used for the word, and is followed by S,N, for the plural.
2642	23 Perhaps THEY ADD. The force of the first character is doubtful.
2643	But see No. 22, 17, and 36, where its meaning seems established.
2644	24 Tны; as No. 12, 21.
2645	25 NAME; as No. 12, 22.
2646	26 Or; as No. 1,8, &c.
2647	27 The HIGH OrFICE; as No. 10, 41. Literally, The Kingship,
2648	showing the ambitious nature of the title used by the high priests
2649	of the temples.
2650	28 HIGH-PrIEsTLy, the adjective in the plural, following its sub-
2651	stantive. The hatchet is NOU, the character under it perhaps B ;
2652	making słorHß, a priest. Voc. 302 and 306. Compare God,
2653	No. 5, 15. The foregoing word tells us that among the various
2654	words for Priest which we find used in this Decree, that written by
2655	means of the hatchet, as No. 2, 19, describes those of highest rank.
2656	• To be WrITren. The character for writing is a pallette or
2657	inkstand, and a reed pen; it is followed by R, sps, the auxiliary
2658	verb of action, and by S,N, for the plural. See Scribe, No.
2659	15, 13, &c.
2660	30 THE; as No. 12,21, and 24.
2661	31 FURTHER, Or ADDITIONAL; S, CH,B,O; CaOpHi; as No.
2662	20,35. See No. I1, 19, and No. 12, 7, where the first three
2663	letters are of a different form, though of the same force.
2664	32 OFFICE OF LORD OF THE BUILDErs; NEB, O, CH,T, followed
2665	by a tool, and the stone which the tool is to cut, as the D.S., and
2666	ending with the sign of abstraction, as at No. 12, 27, which makes
2667	Lord into Lordship. From SHB, Lord, and EKWT, a builder, and
2668	this from KWT, to build. This title seems to be that which
2669	Diodorus Siculus wrote Gnephachthus, as the name of an Egyptian
2670	king. As we see that it was a priestly office, it reminds us of the
2671	Roman priest's title of Pontifex, of which it may perhaps be the
2672	original.
2673	33 PrIEsTLx, as at No. 12, 28, the adjective following its sub-
2674	stantive. See No. 2, 19.
p. 108
2675	60 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, [LINE 12.
2676	34 UNTO or OF; as No. 1,8, &c., but with an N of a different
2677	form.
2678	35 The Gods EverGera; as No. 1,31,&c.
2679	36 THe; as No. 12,24,&e.
2680	37 SIGNET rING; CH, T,M, with the D.S. of the ring. This is
2681	the Hebrew word onn, to seal, to which is allied the Coptie
2682	&ITEBC, to sign. The seal is nearly the same in form as the
2683	ring for a name, No. 12, 22. Again, it is not very unlike the
2684	character for Life, No. 1, 15, and yet more like the character
2685	for a Key.
2686	38 To BE MADe; A,R,E; Sps to make, with D.S. of the workman.
2687	See No. 16, 30.
2688	39 For.the HaNDs; T,I; TOT, with S,N, for tbe plural. In
2689	choosing a letter T, the artist naturally takes one that assists his
2690	spelling. The hand, when beld up, with the thumb away from
2691	the fingers, becomes the Hlebrew letter Teth, D, which, moreover,
2692	keeps its original Coptie name.
2693	40 UpoN, the preposition placed after its plural noun; or ratber
2694	UPON THEM, the word Them meaning tbe Hands, the last word;
2695	S,H,R, C&2PE, within, followed by S,N, the plural termination.
2696	See No. 22, 40, where E&PA, the preposition in the same way
2697	follows its substantive. See also No. 7, 32, where this class of
2698	prepositions is explained.
2699	41 Perhäps Worn; KI; KH placed. See No. 16,43, and 19, 19.
2700	Line 13.
2701	1 A IRIBE, of Priests. See No. 13, 18, and 15, 31, where the
2702	recurrence of the word, with the required numerals, quite proves
2703	its meaning.
2704	• 2 AvOTHER; CH,T; KET as No. 30, 7. See No. 1, 9, and 8, 31,
2705	for the force of the CH; and No. 27, 15, for the force of the T.
2706	3 PRIESTS, as No. 1, 24, &c.
2707	4 Shall be APPOINTED. See No. 4, 17, and 8, 3.
2708	5 IN; as No. 5,3, &e.
2709	The TemPles; as No.2,18, and 5,4, &c.
2710	7 HEREAFTER; as No. 12, 16.
2711	8 IN ADDITION IO, seema bere required, but the second letter is of
p. 109
2712	LINE 13.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 61
2713	uncertain force. It is perhaps an H; and very probably the group
2714	is the same as No. 15, 21, the compound preposition ll and
2715	EDPHs, or rather in this case de and EZE also. See No. 16, 6.
2716	10 THE, as No. 12, 24, &c.
2717	11 FOUR TRIBES; see No. 13, 1.
2718	The four established orders of priests are shown on the
2719	Sarcophagus of Amyrtæus in the British Museum; see Egypt.
2720	Inscript. pl. 32. The first, the Soteno, wear the crown of Upper
2721	Egypt. Their name is nearly the same as No. 1, 12. The Nouto
2722	wear the crown of Lower Egypt; their name is No. 1, 13. The
2723	Othpho aré those dedicated; their name is at No. 25, 1. The
2724	Bachano are the temple servants, and No. 33, 27 is probably one
2725	form of their names; but their name on the sarcophagus quoted
2726	is formed of the word No. 11,5, servants.
2727	12 Perbaps OF OLD; CH, P; XWM to hide, being the time lost
2728	sight of, as No. 8, 20, &c.
2729	13 On Dax; A,0, the article; E,0, E2OOX, day; R,E, pH the
2730	sun, used, perhaps, for the D.S. See No. 18, 14, where it has
2731	fewer letters.
2732	14 THAT; tbe pronoun-adjective following the substantive; as
2733	No. 2,15, and 3, 25.
2734	15 Tobe made; H,T, O,T; &I TOT, to endeavour, literally to put
2735	out the hand. See No. 12, 17.
2736	16 INro; the preposition, as No. 10, 42.
2737	17 Probably Conspicuous; as No. 37, 18, where it is so rendered
2738	in the Greek.
2739	18 FIrTH TRIBE; see No. 13, 1, and 16, 9.
2740	19 FOR, Or BELONGING TO; the preposition, as No. 1, 8, and
2741	No. 13, 16.
2742	20 The GODs EVERGETa; as No. 1, 31, &c.
2743	21 WHErEAs; R,N,T,E; R the preposition of No. A, 8, and 15,
2744	16; and NTE, NT, which. See No. 16, 45, where it has the
2745	same meaning.
2746	22 UPoN, as No. 7, 32; or EvENI, as No. 8, 12. We may read
2747	either, "When the event happened," or "Upon its happening."
2748	See No. 7, 32 for an explanation of this word.
2749	23 It HAPPENED; as No. 8, 15, and 8, 27.
p. 110
2750	62 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 13.
2751	24 With FORTUND; as No. 8, 16.
2752	25 Goon; the adjective following the substantive. The meaning
2753	of this character is very certain, from its use on the Rosetta Stone;
2754	but its sound is less so. It is probably a B, and represents
2755	oraß, holy. Voc. 1387. See No. 14, 1.
2756	26 AND, as No. 1, 28, &c.
2757	27 Probably GOOD FORTUNE. See No. 6, 13, and 11, 10, where
2758	the character differs slightly from this.
2759	28 ConsIDErInG, is the meaning given to this word at No. 11, 12.
2760	It should he Whereas, according to the Greek, which tells us to
2761	alter the order of these last few words, thus: " Whereas it once
2762	happened with good fortunc."
2763	29 The BirtH; M,S,T,O; from eeEc, born. The TO is like the
2764	plural suffix TOY. See No. 35, 9, Daughters.
2765	30,31, KINg; as No. 1, 12, and 13.
2766	32, 33, 34, 35, 36, PTOLEMY, LIVING fOr EVER, BELOVED by PTHAn;
2767	as No. 1,14-18.
2768	37 SoN; as No. 1, 19.
2769	38 Of; as No. 1, 20, &c.
2770	39 The BROTHER-GODS; as No. 1, 29.
2771	40 In, the preposition ; as No. 13, 38, &c., with the usual irregu-
2772	larity in its meaning.
2773	41 Drus, the Macedonian month; as No. 3, 13, except that here
2774	it is followed, in mistake, by the D.S. of a city instead of the
2775	simple ring the D.S. of time.
2776	42 UPoN; as No. 1,4, and 3, 21.
2777	43 The FIrTH DAY; the numeral preceded by the D.S. for time
2778	without the word Day.
2779	44 The indefinite artiele Or, prefixed to the following passive
2780	particle.
2781	45 WHICH MADE; A,R,F, from SpE, to make. The F postfixed is
2782	C, the prefix of an active verb, which thus becomes He made, or of
2783	its equivalent, the passive It was made, as No. 7, 31. See No. 8,
2784	38, and 16, 39, for the &l postfixed.
2785	46 The Dax; as No. 2,14.
2786	47 THAT; the pronoun following its substantive; as No. 2, 1, and
2787	14,27, aud with a different form of the P, No. 2, 15, and 3, 25.
p. 111
2788	LINE 14.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 63
2789	48 HAPPIness; ERO, T,E; as No. 8, 21, where it is followed by
2790	the feminine article.
2791	49 OUr; P,O,N; nwr. This pronoun supports our reading
2792	PN as That; see No. 13, 47, and 2, 15, &e.
2793	Line 14.
2794	Good, the adjective following its substantive, Happiness. Of
2795	these characters the last, which, when alone, as at No. 13, '25,
2796	means Good, here seems like the D.S. to the preeeding letters.
2797	These are I,B, and may be Oraß, holy.
2798	2 GREAT, in the plural, as No. 5, 2, and 5, 37; another second
2799	adjective following its substantive, Happiness. But we see no
2800	reason for its being in the plural.
2801	3 UNIO; as No. 10, 42; 13, 16; &c.
2802	4 The LIVING MEN and WOMEN; as No. 8, 4, and 7,20.
2803	5 All; NEB,O; NißJ, all. Compare No. 5, 23, and 7, 21.
2804	There shall be ENROLLED T,O,T; TaIWT, to place.
2805	7 The PrIests; as No. 1, 24, &c. This, it will be observed, is
2806	a general word, including the priests of several, perhaps of all,
2807	ranks.
2808	8 Probably ALREADy. See No. 14, 20, and 16, 21, and in par-
2809	tieular No. 23, 45, where the Greek requires Immediately.
2810	9 Of the rank of Sot, or SoTEN, as often spelt; S,T, with the
2811	D.S. of a man wearing the crown peculiar to that order of priests.
2812	See No. 1, 12.
2813	Ibus the new tribe is to be composed wholly of priests taken
2814	out of the highest tribe, that of the Soteno, giving thereby to the
2815	priests of that rank, as the governing body was eleeted by tribes,
2816	a double share of the representation.
2817	10 ToMPles; as No. 2,18, &c., but preceded by the indefinite
2818	article Ox.
2819	11. FRom, or since, according to the Greek; literally, SH, A; Lyd,
2820	until. But this difference is readily explained. This is only half
2821	the phrase, of which the latter half is No. 14, 21. Together they
2822	are çya eesral, until this; but when separated, with a date
2823	following éach, the force of the two words rests on the second,
2824	and we must translate them From—Until. See No. 22, 28, and
p. 112
2825	64 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 14.
2826	33. This may be compared to the French Ne-pas, and Ne-point,
2827	where, in consequence of the two words having been long used
2828	together, the meaning of the first is at last transferred on to the
2829	second. "Our first character is a row of growing plants, and hence
2830	its force from LyE, a twig. From this was copied the Hebrew
2831	letter W.
2832	12 THAT; as No. 3,25, &tc. It usually follows its substantive;
2833	here it comes first, and is used for the article The:
2834	13 YEAR; as No. I, 1, heing the civil year used in dates.
2835	14 FırsT, in the feminine; as shown by the final T. See No.
2836	14, 39. No. 22, 23, is the same in the masculine. Perbaps
2837	the T'makes the Cardinal number into an Ordinal, as No. 1, 2.
2838	15 OF; as No. 1, 8, &c.
2839	16 HIS MAJESTY; as No. 3, 18, and 27, &c.
2840	17 LIKEWISE; as No. 4, 31, &c.
2841	18 THosE, though more literally THat, in the singular; as No.
2842	9,44; also No. 9,42, with a different character for the second
2843	letter.
2844	19 Shall be ENROLLED; I,0,I,O. See No. 14, 6, where this word
2845	is spelt with different characters; and also No. 4, 7, where the
2846	D.S. gives to these characters the meaning of Religious Honours,
2847	and No. 17, 32; and 18, 25, where it means, to be celebrated with
2848	religious honours.
2849	20 THOSE IMMEDIATELX; being the plural of No. 14, 8. See
2850	No. 16,21.
2851	21 UNrIL, literally, M,N,O, eesras, this or hitherto, preceded by
2852	the article. See No. 14, 11, where the two words uya eerrar
2853	are explained.
2854	22 The YEAR, being that used in dates; as No. 1, 1.
2855	23 NINTE; the ordinal numher, as No. 1, 2.
2856	24 MESORE; the last month in the Egyptian year, pietured by
2857	four moons and water, meaning the fourth month of the season of
2858	inundation. As the inundation began about the 18th of July,
2859	this month should begin on the 16th of October. But when the
2860	Calendar was adjusted, B.c. 1322, in the reign of Menophra, the
2861	months were already out of place, and this month then began on
p. 113
2862	LINE 14.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 65
2863	the 13th of June, where, at the time, it was no doubt supposed it
2864	would remain. But in the course of years another change had
2865	taken place; and now, on the 9th year of Euergetes, the month
2866	of Mesore began about the 17th of September.
2867	25 WITHIN; CH, R; ЕДрнI. See No. 15, 7; 24, 16; and
2868	35, 13, for this preposition.
2869	26 TRrBE; as No. 13, 1, Sc.
2870	27 THaT; pronoun adjective following its substantive, as No. 13,
2871	14, and 13, 47.
2872	28 LIKEWISE; as No. 4, 3l.
2873	29 THOsE Born; M,S,O, three dots, and S,N; erEc, born, with
2874	three plural terminations, the O for Of, the dots, and S,N. See
2875	No. 15,6; and also No. 13, 29 Birth.
2876	30 For or UNtIL; as No. 10, 26, and 11, 8.
2877	31 EvEr; as No. 10,27, and 1l, 9.
2878	32 The PRIESTs; as No. 1, 24, &c.
2879	33 EACH; as No. 12, 9, though with an O uf a different form.
2880	34 It is DECREED; as No. 4, 17, &e.
2881	35, 36 THOSE WHO HAD BEEN ADDED: No. 35 is N,R, the prefix
2882	srEpE of the past tense; and No.36 is R,I,E; PHT, grafted on.
2883	See No. 6, 30, and 17, 18; also No. 15, 3.
2884	37 BEFORE; R,M,N; for which we have in Coptic either Epie
2885	or Epsr.
2886	38 The Year, as used in dates. See No. 1,1.
2887	39 FIRsT; as No. 14, 14. It is in the feminine.
2888	40 OF OLD; as No. 13, 12, and 16, 41.
2889	41 IN; as No. 13, 5, &c.
2890	42 The TRIBEs; as No. 13, 11.
2891	Line 15.
2892	APPOINTED, in the plural; the adjective to the foregoing sub-
2893	stantive. See Decreed, No. 14, 34.
2894	2 Into wHIcH; as No. 6, 29, and 15, 36.
2895	3 THEY HAD BEEN ADDED; as No. 14, 35, and 36. Here the
2896	sculptor seems to have forgotten the prefix NEPE, and to have
2897	afterwards added a small N, to supply the want.
2898	F
p. 114
2899	66 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROOLYPHICS. [LINE 15.
2900	4 IN LIKE MANNER AS; H,T,T, from ZE, like. See No. 34, 38,
2901	where in the Greek it is rendered A copy.
2902	5 BEFORE; R,R,R,N; 2spEN, before. The RR are used for
2903	H,R, as at No. 10, 26; and the previous R may he also a pre-
2904	position, as No. 11, 6, and 15, 37, making the whole a compound
2905	preposition in a manner not unusual.
2906	6 THOSE BORN; as No. 14, 29.
2907	7 AFTER; as required by the Greek. See No. 14, 25, where it
2908	is translated Within.
2909	8 TimE, literally the Svn; R,E; pH. See No. 1, 1, &c., where
2910	the sun is the D.S. for Time; and No. 5, 22; where these two
2911	letters are so used.
2912	THAT; the pronoun adjective to the foregoing substantive; as
2913	No. 3,25, and 2,15.
2914	10 FURTHER; R,R,A; E2PHI, the preposition; the RR for
2915	HR, as at No. 10, 26.
2916	11 KEPT; H,R,H; ZapE2.
2917	12 Among; the preposition, as No. 14, 4L, &c.
2918	13 The SCrIBEs. The character represents a flat ruler, which is
2919	at the same time a pen-holder, and has several hollows for ink or
2920	paint; and to this is joined a reed pen. See No. 18, 22 ;
2921	also No. 37, 7, Letters, and No. 12, 29, Written.
2922	14 The TrIBEs; as No. 13, 1, preceded by the indefinite article Og.
2923	15 WHICH; N,T,E; NT, as No. 9, 44, and 14, 18.
2924	16 OF; the preposition, as No. 4, 8, &e.
2925	17 FATHERS; T,F,E, with S,N, for the plural, as No. 4, 4.
2926	18 AMoNG; as No. 15, 12.
2927	19 THOSE WHICH; P,1, with S,N, for the plural; TET, who.
2928	See No. 16, 8; see also No. 4, 37, where the human head is a P,
2929	and No. 5, 13, where we have the head of another animal for that
2930	letter.
2931	20 MADE; I,R,I; sps, to make, as No. 17, 33.
2932	21 INSTEAD, according to the Greek; a compound preposition ;
2933	M, CHRE; ee and EOpHs, fo, in. From Dpe, flesh, we get
2934	the force of this joint of meat; as at No. 10, 46.
p. 115
2935	LINE 15.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 67
2936	22 Or; as No. 3, 17, and 10, 42, &c.
2937	23 PRIEsTLx; the substantive used as an adjective. See No.
2938	1,24, &c.
2939	24 TWENTY; the numerals, as at No. 1,7.
2940	25 SEnAtoRs, according to the Greek ; ?, CH,T,O, plural; perhaps
2941	srcyt, a chief. The first letter may be an N, in form a mallet,
2942	from srE2, to bruise, and expressed oil.
2943	26 CHosEN, according to the Greek; M, followed by a character
2944	of doubtful force, and then by an R. In the first name of
2945	Rameses II. this character is translated by Hermapion, Approved;
2946	"Approved by Ra." We find it also in the name of Ptolemy
2947	Euergetes, where, by the help of the Rosetta Stone we read,
2948	"Approved by Pthah." It is perhaps COTC, a scraping instru-
2949	ment; and thus may represent CETM, to chnose.
2950	27 YEARLY; as No. 5, 22; I,R, BAI, for єтеросепI.
2951	28 By or Io; as No. 1, 8, and 10, 38, and 13, 19, where we have
2952	very various meanings to this preposition.
2953	29 YEAR; as No. 7,33, being the year of the seasons, while at
2954	No. 15,27, we had the civil year, as No. 1, 1.
2955	30 OUI OF; M; èe, the preposition, as No. 5, 3, &c., where we
2956	have often translated it In.
2957	32 The rour TrIBes, as No. 13, 1. Here we learn that the
2958	ecclesiastical senate gave an equal weight to each of the four
2959	ranks of priests. As the higher ranks consisted of a smaller
2960	number of priests, and yet had an equal number of represen-
2961	tative senators, they had a large share of the power. And as
2962	the five new senators were all to be priests of the highest rank,
2963	that of the Soteno, these high priests gained by this Decree a
2964	still greater weight in the management of the ecclesiastical matters.
2965	33 ExIstING, according to the Greek; perhaps Former; H,R,M,
2966	aspee, before. See No. 7, 32, and also No. 11, 38.
2967	34 ScrIBes; S,A, with D.S. of a man; Ca2, to write or paint.
2968	35 FIvE; the numerals; as No. 1, 7, &c.
2969	36 Wao, or which; as No. 15, 2, but with a different MI.
2970	37 From, the preposition which we translated To, at No. 6, 24.
2971	38 TrIBE; as No. 15, 32, &c.
2972	F2
p. 116
2973	68 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 15.
2974	39 EscH; translated First at No. 14, 14. There it had a final
2975	I, the sign of the feminine.
2976	40 WITHIN; as No. 12, 40. It follows its substantive as that
2977	does, and would seem to make a compound preposition with
2978	No. 15, 37. See No. 7, 32, for the force of the letters.
2979	41 PRIESTs; as No. 14, 32, &c.
2980	42 IWENIY-FIVE; the numerals as No. 1,7, and 15, 24.
2981	Line 16.
2982	1 An imperfect character or characters; perhaps P,E, ME the
2983	article THE, as No. 8, 11, &e.
2984	2 SENATOrs, as No. 15, 25.
2985	3 SCRIBEs; as No. 15, 34, but preceded by the indefinite
2986	article, or.
2987	4 FIve; the numerals, as No. 15, 35.
2988	5 Perhaps DivIDeD orr; N,N,T,O; ram may be the plural
2989	prefix, and TOl to divide.
2990	6 IN ADDITION; as No. 13,8. See also No. 22,36, where the second
2991	character, witbout the preposition M, clearly means Additional.
2992	7 FroM; as No. 15, 30.
2993	8 TнE; P,T; ПEТ, who; as No. 15, 19.
2994	9 FIFTH TRIBE; though there is no letter to make the cardinal
2995	number into an ordinal. See No. 15, 32, Four tribes.
2996	10 BELONGING IO; the preposition, or the prefix of the genitive
2997	case, as No. 14, 3, &e.
2998	11 The GODs EUERGETa; as No. 1, 31, &c.
2999	12 There shall BE GIVEN; as No. 10, 22, &e.
3000	13 A character of doubtful meaning, being the halt of an oval ring
3001	for a name, followed by N, Unto.
3002	14 Perhaps The AProINteD; CM, O, plural; XW, to appoint.
3003	Sce No. 1, 9, where this word is used as an abridgment of XCHICr.
3004	15 FIFTE TRIBE; as No. 16, 9.
3005	16 BELONGING IO; as No. 16, 10.
3006	17 The GODs EVERGEra; as No. 16, 11, &c.
3007	18 ProM; as No. 15, 30, and 16, 7.
3008	19 THOSE THINGS; N,T,A, plural; MT, NTE. See No. 15, 15,
3009	where there is a different form of the vowel.
p. 117
3010	LINE 16] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 69
3011	20 ALL; NEB, T,N; MIBEN, all. See No. 7,27, and 16, 28,
3012	where we in the same way have a T more than is wanted for
3013	the word srißl, all.
3014	21 HITHERtO; see No. 14,8, where it is rendered already, and
3015	No. 14, 20; immediately.
3016	22 MADE; R,I; some part of the verb sps to make. See No.
3017	4, 38, where these characters are changed in their order. But as
3018	the verb begins and ends with an I, either letter may come first.
3019	23 PUrIFICATIoNs; as No.2,21; but here followed by the D.S.
3020	of water.
3021	24 IN; as No. 9,45; but the same preposition as No. 16, 18,
3022	which is rendered From.
3023	25 The TEMPLE, literally, Divine building. See No. 5, 30, Temple,
3024	and No. 2, 18, for House.
3025	26 AND; as No. 1,28, &c.
3026	27 OTHER THINGs; as No. 5, 25, and 3, 5.
3027	28 ALL; as No. 7, 27, &c.
3028	29 The indefinite article, A,O; OY; as at No. 16, 3, &c. But
3029	from No. 20,31, this would seem to be a part of the coming
3030	word.
3031	30 Things DONE; A,R,E, with D.S. of the agent; and S,N, for the
3032	plural. See No. 12,38.
3033	31 IN; as No. 4, 13, and 9, 40.
3034	32 The SANctUARIEs; R, with E,A, for Hs house, and the plural.
3035	The R is ps, a cell, or room. In the ecelesiastical writers it is
3036	the name of the hermits' cells. It here may mean the inner
3037	covered room in the temple, the Holy of Holies; and our com-
3038	pound word, withthe article inserted between Cell, and House,
3039	becomes EpCES, the sanctuary of the temple. See No. 28, 31.
3040	33 Of the Counrar; the D.S. without the word. See No. 1,
3041	10, 8тс.
3042	34 The CHIEr; SH, A; LE, a sceptre; of which the first character
3043	is a picture. The Hebrew word for a Sceptre, often meaning a
3044	Tribe, should be rendered Chief in each of the following places:
3045	Genesis xlix., 16; 2 Sam. v., I; and 2 Sam. vii., 7. See No. 1,
3046	31, for this character.
p. 118
3047	70 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 16.
3048	35 Of; as No. 1,8, &e.
3049	36 The TRIBE; as No. 15, 38, &c. The D.S. of the man belongs,
3050	in an unusual way, not to the word it follows, but to the word
3051	Chief, No. 16, 34.
3052	37 Probably RoraI, or some title for this chief priest. The bird
3053	may be either the letter A, as is more usual, or the syllable HOR,
3054	for the god Horus, and orpo, king. The difference hetween the
3055	two words is slightly shown in a careful seulpture, in the shorter
3056	neck, and more hooked beak, of the Royal bird; but if either the
3057	sculpture or the drawing is rude, this distinction is lost. The
3058	Royal hird is well distinguished at No. 3, 27, and 7, 29, by the
3059	whip of Osiris, which accompanies it. But the whip is absent
3060	from No. 6, 15, the same word. See No. 12, 27, where the office
3061	of high priest is called a Kingship.
3062	38 HIGH PRIEST; as No. 2, 19.
3063	39 Shall be REMEMBERED; A,M,E; ELl8, to remember, with el,
3064	the sign of the third person singular; as No. 19, 7.
3065	40 LIKE; H; 2E, like; meaning perhaps as when. See No. 27, 6,
3066	where the H is followed by the vowel.
3067	41 OF OLD, UPON A IIME, is the rendering that we have given to
3068	this word, at No.13, 12, and 14, 40, &c.
3069	42 IN; as No. 16, 18, &c.
3070	43 ESTABLISHED; K,l; KH, to place. See No. 12, 41, and
3071	19,19.
3072	44 FOUR IRIBES; as No. 15, 32.
3073	=
3074	45 WHEREAs, literally, UPoN IEIs; R, the preposition of No. 15,
3075	16, &rc.; and N,T,E, IT, as No. 15, 15, and 9,44
3076	46 THERE WAs; S,K,I; ECKH, from KH, to be, with S the prefix
3077	of the feminine third person singular.
3078	47 ORDERED, OI an order; T,O; TarO, to tell; as No. 22, 16.
3079	48 To be KEPr; H,B; 2WB, to make, to work, to use.
3080	49 An AssEmBly; as No. 18, 32, &c. The character may repre-
3081	sent a boat with an awning over it; as the great Egyptian gatber-
3082	ings of people always took place by means of the Nile.
p. 119
3083	LINE 17.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 71
3084	Line 17.
3085	1 UNTo, or OF; as No. 16, 10.
3086	2 The GODS EUERGETa; as No. 16, 11, &c.
3087	3 IN; as No. 8, 33.
3088	4 THE TEMPLEs; as No. 2, 18, &c.
3089	Perhaps, HAS BEEN CULEBRATED. The dish, usually NEB,
3090	may be rreel the prefix of the third person singular of the im-
3091	perfect tense; the T,N, may be TworN, to raise up, to
3092	magnify; they are followed by the sitting figure, the D.S. of a
3093	priest wearing ostrich feathers.
3094	6 Month; I,?,T; EBOT, a month; with R,E, PH the sun as the
3095	D.S. of time. The moon, 102, is I, or E; the force of the star is
3096	doubtful. That, however, and the moon, are chosen for pictorial
3097	reasons, as much as for their force as letters.
3098	7 EVERY, ALL; as No. 16, 28, &c.
3099	8 ON, IN; as No. 16, 31, &c.
3100	9 UPON, THE DAX; S,S,0, with the D.S. of time; caca, upon,
3101	as No. 1, 4. This preposition which here seems peculiar to dates,
3102	seems also unnecessary after the former.
3103	10 FIrra; the cardinal number for the ordinal, as No. 16, 9.
3104	11 UPON THE DAX; as No. 17, 9.
3105	12 NINTH; the numeral, as No. 17, 10.
3106	13 DAX IWENTY-FIFTH; the D.S. for Day, the characters for Ten,
3107	as at No. 1,7, &e., and the star with five points for Five.
3108	14 ACCORDING IO; the preposition, as No. 16, 18, &c.
3109	15 MADe; I,R, from sps to make. See No. 4, 38.
3110	16 WRITINg, meaning Decree; as No. 2, 16, but without the roll
3111	of papyrus there added as the D.S.
3112	17 AT FIRST, Or IROM THE BOTTOU; S,H,H,A; CДДрн. Of
3113	the letters R ,R, the first has the foree of an H, or guttural, as in
3114	No. 6,9, and 10, 26. The latter word is spelt with the same
3115	letters as this, excepting the S, with which this begins. See also
3116	No. 34, 26.
3117	18 WAs ADDED; as No. 14,35, and 36.
3118	19 AND; A,0; axW; as No. 2, 3; though these letters are more
3119	often the indefinite article O8.
p. 120
3120	72 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 17.
3121	20,21 WAS CELEBRATED. No. 20 is the prefix rrepe as at No.
3122	17, 18 ; No. 21, is I,O,T; to which we give the same meaning at
3123	No. 19,40, and 21, 16. But perhaps No. 17, 19, which we have
3124	rendered And, as it is very properly rendered near the beginning
3125	of the Inscription, should here be considered as or, the prefix •
3126	for the third person plural; and then our three words become one,
3127	and should be rendered They celebrated. We shall meet with this
3128	prefix to the verl at No. 19, 9, and No. 19, 19.
3129	22 An ASSEMBIX; as No. 16,49.
3130	23 UNTO; as No. 16, 10.
3131	24 The GODs; as No. 5, 15.
3132	25 GREAT; the adjective following its substantive, but without the
3133	plural sign. See No. 5, 2, &c.
3134	26 A FESTIVAL; so rendered in the Greek at No. 17, 34. See
3135	also No. 18, 37. The force of the first character is doubtful.
3136	27 THrOUGHOuT; so rendered in the Greek. At No. 19, 14, and
3137	No. 21,10, we shall see a similar pietorial character used as the
3138	D.S. for Iurning about. The R,MI, nay be, one or other of
3139	them, a preposition.
3140	28 The country; as No. 1, 10, &c.
3141	29 Possibly StItaBLE, an adjective belonging to Festival, No. 17,
3142	26; A,O, CHEM,P; orageeg, what corresponds, from
3143	OX&ZEll, to answer, to renew. See No. 5, 8, and 21, 44; also
3144	No. 8, 9, and No. 21, 51; all of which places present difficulties.
3145	30 IN; as No. 17, 1, &c.
3146	31 A YEAR, of the seasons; as No. 15, 29; mcaning with its
3147	preposition, Every year. The scribe follows the Greek idiom,
3148	NOT EVICUTOV.
3149	32, 33 There is TO BE CELEBRATED; M,T,O,T,O; from TONWT,
3150	a shrine, with M, the prefix of the infinitive mood; and followed
3151	by I,R,E, sps to do, the auxiliary verh, which makes the sub-
3152	stantive into a verb. See No. 18, 25.
3153	34 A FESTIVAL, according to the Greek, as No. 18, 37. The first
3154	character is unknown, the last is SH, as at No. 1, 31, and 29, 32,
3155	and may be lyal, a festival.
3156	35 Perhaps SUITABLE; as No. 17, 29.
p. 121
3157	LINE 17.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIGROGLYPHICS. 73
3158	36 CoNspIcuous; as No. 37, 18, where it is so translated in the
3159	Greek; also No. 19, 34.
3160	37 UNro; as No. 17, 30, &e.
3161	38, &C. KING PTOLEMY LIVING FOR EVER, BELOVED by PTHAH, AND
3162	QUIEN BERENICE, the GODs EvErGETA; as No. 11, 23—33.
3163	Line 18.
3164	5 THROUGHOUT; M,N; eer; At, in; as at No. 7, 28; or
3165	N,M, NEel, At, as No. 23, 11, for the order of the letters is
3166	doubtful.
3167	6 THE; as No. 16, 8, &c.
3168	7 IWo REGIoNs, of Upper and Lower Egypt. The dual form of
3169	the group proves its meaning, though there seems to be no diffe-
3170	rence between the two characters which should distinguish the
3171	regions. See No. 3, 10.
3172	8 EvEry; T,R; THP; as No. 36,24.
3173	9 Cıтy; B,K ; Baks; as No. 5, 33, and 6, 11.
3174	10 Of EGyPT; as No. 9, 12, and 12, 15.
3175	11 AT; the preposition as No. 6, 24, &c.
3176	12 The TIMI; as No. 11, 7, and 12, 16 ; here, however, the word
3177	seems to end with SM, for the plural instead of SN, as is nsual.
3178	See 32, 3, for the same termination. Or, on the other hand, the
3179	final letter may be wanting here, and the M may be a preposition.
3180	13 Of; the preposition; as No. 16, 7, and 16, 18, &c.; unless
3181	this letter be the termination of the last word. As the words
3182	were written wholly by the ear, not spelt, as with us, according to
3183	known laws, and not divided one from the other, it is highly
3184	probable that the writer made the end of one word in part depend
3185	upon the letter that followed it. Thus our word No. 18, 12, may
3186	have lost its final N, beeause the next letter was an M.
3187	14 The DAX; as No. 13, 46. See a longer form of the word
3188	No. 13, 13.
3189	15 SHInINg, or appearing at the star's heliacal rising after it had
3190	been for some days unseen before and after its conjunetion with
3191	the sun. This is the word Illustrious or Epiphanes, the title of
3192	the fifth Ptolemy on the Rosetta Stone; except that there the E,
p. 122
3193	74 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. LLINE 18.
3194	the first letter, is the same as the E in the foregoing word Day;
3195	thus, with the two legs, making the word more pictorial, as Light-
3196	bearing.
3197	16 Isis, according to the Greek; being the word God; followed by
3198	a pyramid for her name, and T,S, the feminine termination used
3199	in the queens' names. This name for the goddess is only used
3200	in the case of her star, the Dog-star. See No. 19, 17.
3201	17 STan, represented pictorially.
3202	Is PLACED; as No. 13, 15. Or this might be taken as the
3203	preposition D&TOT, At, On, a word the same etymologically.
3204	19 The NEW YEAR'S DAY; according to the Greek. See No. 3, 16,
3205	where it is rendered Anniversary, and means the king's birthday.
3206	20 NAMED; being R,N, pas, a name, followed by F, the suffix
3207	for he or his, and preceded by M, a prefix of a verb.
3208	21 THE; as No. 5,24, &c.
3209	22 SCrIBEs; as No. 15, 13.
3210	23 OF; as No. 8, 6, &c.
3211	24 HEAVENLY LIFE. The first character is the areh of heaven, the
3212	second is Life, as No. 1, 15, &c. For these latter words the
3213	Greek has Sacred Scribes.
3214	25 II IS CELEBRATED. See No. 17, 32, and 33, where this word
3215	is compounded with the auxiliary sps, to do, but without the final
3216	F. With that letter it is of the same grammatical form as No. 18,
3217	20, Named, beginning with MI for the infinitive mood, and ending
3218	with F,which makes it a participle.
3219	26 IN; as No. 15,12, &c.
3220	27 The YuAf, that used in dates; as No. I, 1, and 14, 22, &e.
3221	28 NINTH; the cardinals for the numerals, as No. 16, 9, &c.
3222	29 The month of PAYNI, described as the second month of the
3223	season of inundation, by means of two moons, and the D.S. for
3224	water, followed again by the word ptt, the sun, as the D.S. for time.
3225	There are no hieroglyphieal words so clearly symbolical as these
3226	names of the months. Otber characters, while symbolical, or
3227	pictorial to the eye, may very possibly have represented a sound ;
3228	this name for a month represents not the letters of a name, but
p. 123
3229	LINE 18.] EXPLANATION OF TRE HIEROGLYPHICS. 75
3230	its scientific description. Payni, in the Egyptian movable year, at
3231	this time began on the 19th of July, when the Dog-star rose. See
3232	the Calendar.
3233	30 ON or WitH; the preposition, as No. 18, 11. Or this may be
3234	the auxiliary verb prefixed to the next word, as No. 21, 13.
3235	31 The HOLDING, Or CELEBRATING; as No. 17, 21, and No. 19, 33.
3236	32 An ASSEMBLY; as No. 17, 22, &c.
3237	33 OF; as No. 17,37, &c.
3238	34 The NEW YEAR'S DAY; as No. 18, 19, &.c.; but with a slight
3239	variation. Compare No. 36, 6, the pattern, or mark, put upon the
3240	sacred loaves; by which it would secm that this word is literally
3241	the marked day of the year.
3242	35 UNro; as No. 17, 37, &c.
3243	36 PAsHt, the goddess of Bubastis; her name followed by I',S, the
3244	feminine termination, as in the queens' names. She is known on
3245	the monuments by having a cat's head.
3246	37 FestIvaI, called in the Greck the great festival; as No. 17,34.
3247	Herodotus was present at one of these festivals in the City of
3248	Bubastis, and describes it in lib. II. 60.
3249	38 UNIO; as No. 18, 35.
3250	39 PASHT; as No. 18, 36, followed by the D.S. of a sitting figure.
3251	40 In; the preposition, as No. 18, 26.
3252	41 MoNTH; as No. 17, 6.
3253	42 THat, the pronoun adjective following its substantive; as
3254	No. 13, 47, 8c.
3255	43 An unknown character, for which the Greek gives us no help.
3256	41 BECAUSE OF; as No. 16, 45, &c.
3257	45 WHICH; N,T,E; NET; as No. 15, 15, &c.
3258	46 The SEASON; as No. 17,29, but in a shorter form.
3259	47 FoR; as No. 18, 33, &c.
3260	Line 19.
3261	1 RELIGIOUS CEREMONTES, as No, 4, 7. But here we have an S,
3262	for which we can give no reason, except by supposing that the
3263	word should bave ended with SN, for the plural, and that the
3264	sculptor remedied his omission by crowding in this S in a rather
3265	unsuitable placc.
p. 124
3266	76 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 19.
3267	2 BECAUSE oF; the preposition; as No. 18, 44.
3268	The FRUIT; T,0, plural; perhaps Ortad, fruit, in which
3269	the first syllable may be only the article.
3270	4 ALl; as No. 17, 7, &c.
3271	5 The OVERFLOW; possibly goErl, a flood; hut the force of the
3272	first character is uncertain. The wavy lines may be D.S. for
3273	water, or may be in place of the final M in this word. Horapollo
3274	says that the Egyptians call the Nile's inundation Noun, a word
3275	represented by these three characters for N.
3276	6 The NILE; as No. 7, 35.
3277	7 Is CELEBRATED, literally, remembered, as No. 3, 19, and 4, 6.
3278	Here, as at No. 16, 39, tbe word ends with F, the sign of the third
3279	person singular.
3280	8 Possibly BeHoLD, the interjection; A,S; IC. Compare JCXE,
3281	Behold if, No. 19, 13; also No. 8, 13.
3282	9 THEY MARE; A,O, the prefix for the third person plural, Oy ;
3283	A,R, Ips, to make; and F, the pronoun Cl of the third person
3284	singular. See No. 16, 30.
3285	10 A DECRIE; as No. 4, 17, &c.
3286	It HAPPENS; as No. 8, 15, &e.
3287	12 By FORTUNE, or accident; as No. 8, 16, &c.
3288	13 BEHOLD IF; as No.8, 13, and 7,30, where it is rendered When.
3289	We must here read, "If it happens by accident;" changing the
3290	order of the words as at No. 22, 7.
3291	14 The cHANgING; SH, B; LyWB, to change, with the serpentine
3292	line as D.S. See the first letter in No. 36, 34.
3293	15 The FESTIVAl; as No. 18, 37, &c.
3294	16 OF; as No. 15,28, &c.
3295	17 Isis, the name of the Dog-star; as No. 18, 16.
3296	18 The sTAR, represented pictorially; as No. 18, 17.
3297	19 Shall be PLACED; from K,I, Ka, to place, as No. 12, 4l.
3298	More literally, They shall place, as it begins with A,0, the OY,
3299	the sign of the third person plural, as at No. 19,9.
3300	20 ADAX; as No. 18,14.
3301	21 FURTHER ON; T,N,N,O; TNNOON, to send forward.
p. 125
3302	LINE 19.] EAPLANATION OF THE HIDROGLYPHICS. 77
3303	22 BECAUSE oF, is required by the Greek; but the meaning of the
3304	character is uncertain.
3305	23 The yral, of the seasons, as No. 7,33, and without the D.S. of
3306	the civil year, as No. 1,1.
3307	24 The FoUrTH; the numerals with the final T, which in Coptic
3308	changes the cardinal numbers into ordinals.
3309	25 Probably Br NoTHINg. The first letter, R, may be the pre-
3310	position; the next two are the word Not in the speeches of the
3311	forty-two witnesses in the Book of the Dead; but here in the
3312	forms of a noun substantive with S,N, the plural termination.
3313	See Not at No. 31, 12.
3314	26 The RELIGIOUS CEREMONIEs; 1,0,1; OOXWT, an image; as
3315	No. 4,7, and 19, l.
3316	27 The DAX; as No. 19, 20, &c.
3317	28 WAS MADE; N,I,R; sps from to make, with re the prefix of
3318	the past tense. See No. 20, 23, for the same word; also No. 17,
3319	33, for the verb without this prefix.
3320	29 An ASSEMBLY; being a compound word fornied of No. 16, 48,
3321	to keep, and No. 16, 49, an assembly.
3322	30 THat; the pronoun adjective following its substantive, as
3323	No. 14,27, Sc.
3324	31 Ir, the article for the pronoun; as No. 5, 20, &c.
3325	32 SHALL BE DONE; S,R; the auxiliary verb ipi to do, preceded
3326	by S, the sign of the future tense. Compare No. 31, 21, which
3327	is this and the next word united.
3328	33 CELEBRATED; as No. 17, 21, &c.
3329	34 CONSPICUOUSLY; as No. 17, 36, and No. 37, 18.
3330	35 BEING BEGUN; H,T,T,F; &ITOT, to begin, followed by cf the
3331	sign of third person singular, and preceded by the article Or. See
3332	No. 13, 15. This verb, meaning literally, to place the hand, has a
3333	variety of meanings, and often does little more than add emphasis.
3334	36 UPoN; as No. 18, 40, &c.
3335	37 The month Payni; as No. 18, 29.
3336	38 The Dar; the D.S. for time, which bere seems wanted for this
3337	word, rather than as part of the name of the month, as in
3338	No. 18,29.
p. 126
3339	78 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 19.
3340	39 PIRST; as No. 14, 39, and 15, 39, in the former of which
3341	places it has a feminine termination.
3342	40 The CELEBRATION; as No. 19, 33; but here it is more con-
3343	venient to use it as a , substantive.
3344	41 Of the AssemBLx; as No. 18, 32, &c.
3345	42 Was REMEMBERED, meaning, was kept; as No. 29, 19.
3346	43 Probably Bx us; T,T,M; ÈTOTEN with the hieroglyphic M
3347	in place of the Coptic N. The word TOT, a hand, forms part of
3348	many Coptic words as here, and in ZITOT No. 19,35. See
3349	No. 21,41, where the writer also uses the first person plural.
3350	44 The YEat, as used in dates. See No. 1,1, &c.
3351	Line 20.
3352	1 NINTH; as No. 1, 2.
3353	2 Shall be CELEBRATeD; as No. 19, 40, and 19, 33, and 18, 31;
3354	in all of which the order of the letters is more clearly shown than
3355	here. Here the T is understood to be below the bird, and there-
3356	fore after it, in the same way that in No. 5,15, god; No. 10, 43,
3357	H,Y,K, king; No. I, 16, H,T,N, ever; the upper letter is under-
3358	stood to be the first in the word. See, however, No. 16, 47, and
3359	No. 17, 32, where this rule is not followed, but the more natural
3360	one, that the character which comes first is to be read as the first.
3361	An AssEMBLY; as No. 18, 32, &c.
3362	4 THAT; as No. 3, 25, and 19, 30, &te.
3363	5 DurIng; the preposition, as No. 15, 37, &c.
3364	FIVE DAYS; as No. 22,14.
3365	7 DIaDem; the upper part of the head tied with a ribband, which
3366	was the simple crown, or mark of royalty, worn by the Ptolemies,
3367	as is shown on their coins.
3368	8 Persons BRINgING; N ,A, with S,N, for the plural; ra to bring.
3369	But remark that we have here the same letters in the word Those,
3370	No. 8,8.
3371	9 WITH; M, the preposition, as No. 25, 41; though the owl, the
3372	more ornamental form of the letter, is usually used, as No. 19,36;
3373	20,11, &c.
3374	10 Possibly Corn; H,O, plural; 201.
3375	11 WitH; as No. 20, 9; though with a different form of letter.
p. 127
3376	LINE 20.J EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 79
3377	12 SACRIrIcEs, according to the Greek; M,S; eeaçy, to strike,
3378	probably to stay.
3379	13 OTHERs; as No. 3, 5, &c.
3380	14 THE; as No. 18, 21, &c.
3381	15 ALraR; S,H,E,O; ¿yHOYs followed by the D.S. This is a
3382	basin standing on a pillar. The British Museum contains several
3383	such hasins.
3384	16 THE; as No. 20, 14, &c.
3385	17 Perhaps Dorngs ; I,B,O ; from sps with the plural termination
3386	o8. See No.17, 33, and 15, 20, &c.
3387	18 Perhaps SIMYLAR; T,N,T, plural; from TNTWN, similar. '
3388	19 AND; as No. 16, 26, &c.
3389	20 OTHER THINGs; as No. 20, 13, &e.
3390	21 ALL; as No. 8, 5, &c.
3391	22 SHALL BI CELEBRATED; as No. 4, 7; but here, as a verb with
3392	S, the prefix of the future tense, as No. 33, 1.
3393	23 Which have been MADe; N,I,R, from sps to make, with sr€
3394	the prefix of the past tense. See No. 19,28.
3395	24 UNTII; R,R,A; E2pH8 as No. 14, 30, &c. See the next
3396	word.
3397	25 The EvenT; H,R, Zpa, the face; as No. 8, 12. This and
3398	the last word seem to make a compound word, meaning FoR-
3399	MERLY. See No. 7, 32, where this word is explained.
3400	26 CONSPICuOUsLY; as No. 19, 34, &c.
3401	27 BEHOLD IF; A,S,K, the particle SCXE, which at No. 7, 30,
3402	means When, and at No. 19, 13, If.
3403	28 IT IS DONE; R,I,R, some part of the auxiliary verb sps to
3404	make. Compare No. 6, 2, which is spelt differently.
3405	29 The SEAsONs, üpas, according to the Greek; but the word is
3406	composed of the civil years, with a second plural termination.
3407	See No. 1, 1.
3408	30 THE; as No. 20, 14, &c.
3409	31 DoIngs; as No. 16, 29, and 30, with the same D.S., though
3410	spelt rather differently. See also No. 12, 38.
3411	32 IN RESPECT OF, a compound preposition. T'he first R may be
p. 128
3412	80 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 20.
3413	the preposition, No. 18, I1, &c.; the R,R,I, E2PHI upon, as
3414	No. 20,24.
3415	33 EvERy THING; CH, NEB,T. This is two words shortened into
3416	one. They are written in full at No. 16, 27, and 28. More
3417	nearly spelt like this is No. 26, 27.
3418	34 LIKE; H,A; 2E; as No. 16, 40, and 27, 6, and 21, 46.
3419	35 FORMER; S, CH,R,O, plural; CAOpHi, beyond or beneath.
3420	See No. 12, 7, where it meaus Beyond, backward into time, and
3421	theretore Former; and also No. 12, 31, where it is Additional.
3422	36 DECREE or ARRANGEMENT; as No. 4, 17; 15, 1, &c.
3423	37 WHIcH, or Tнe; P,T; ПETE; as No. 16, 8, aud 15, 19.
3424	38 The HEaveNs; being P,T, the first the picture of the arch of
3425	heaven, and also TTH, the heavens; the second the feminine article,
3426	which in Coptic is prefixed. The heavens are often represented
3427	by the goddess Neith, which is in agreement with the gender of
3428	the noun.
3429	39 SHALI NOT HAVE; S,MI,N,T; from eeeeort, not to have,
3430	with S, the prefix of the future tense, of which we have seen so
3431	many examples. See No. 6,28, Not having.
3432	40 THE; as No. 20, 16, &c.
3433	41 Possibly TURNING ABOUT; S,M; бElE.
3434	42 DAX; as No. 19,27, &c.
3435	Line 21.
3436	1 THaT; the pronoun adjective following its substantive, as
3437	No. 3, 25, &c.
3438	2 OF; as No. 15,16, &c.
3439	3 Probably THe WoLF; meaning the Dog-star; B,N,S; Buuncy.
3440	That the wolf gave its Egyptian name to the Dog-star appears
3441	probable from the word runaßas, a year, a word chiefly known in
3442	Alexandria, and which seems to mean the coming of the wolf.
3443	4 Shall HAPPEN; as No. 19, 11, and 8, 15, &c., with S, the prefix
3444	of the future tense, as No. 20, 39.
3445	5 TO COME TO PASS, Or BY FORTUNE; as No. 8, 16, and
3446	19,12, &c.
3447	6 AT ANY TIME; as No. 14,40, &c., where it means, Of old;
3448	here it means a future tiine.
p. 129
3449	LINE 21.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 81
3450	7 Bx; the preposition; as No. 21, 2, &te.
3451	8 DECREE; as No. 4, 17; and 20, 36, &c.
3452	The ASSEMBLIEs; as No. 19, 41, &e.
3453	10 MADE TO CHANGE; the pictorial figure of turning about,
3454	followed by R, for sps the verb of action. See No. 21, 23, where
3455	this figure is the D.S. of change.
3456	11 IN; as No. 19,36, &c.
3457	12 Tne COUNTRX; as No. 11, 18, &c.
3458	13 THOSE WHICH ARE HELD; I,O,T. We have this word re-
3459	peatedly so translated by the Greek. The R with which it begins
3460	is sps, the auxiliary of action. See No. 19, 40.
3461	14 IN; as No. 16,31.
3462	15 WINTER; according to the Greek. The year is divided into
3463	three seasons of Inundation, Housing, and Vegetation; and
3464	therefore no two words can correspond exactly with the summer
3465	and winter of the Greek. See the Egyptian Calendar.
3466	16 SHOULD BE HELD; as No. 21, 13. The difference in the
3467	characters, and the apparent difference in their order, does not
3468	alter the word.
3469	17 IN; as No. 21,14, but with an M of a different form.
3470	18 SummEr, or the season of inundation, marked by the character
3471	for water.
3472	19 IN; as No. 21, 17, &e.
3473	20 Perhaps SEAsON, as No. 21, 44, and No. 25, 41; compare
3474	No. 5, 8, where the force of this eharacter is explained.
3475	21 EACH, as at No. 15, 39; though more often First, as No. 19, 39,
3476	or One, as No. 21, 29.
3477	22 TaE; as No. 20, 14, &c.
3478	23 CHANGE; as No. 19, 14.
3479	24 The FESTIVAL; as No. 19, 15.
3480	25 OF; as No. 19, 16, &c.
3481	26 The STAR oF IsIs; as No. 19, 17, and 18; but bere the figure
3482	of the star is omitted.
3483	27 Bx; as No. 21,17, &c.
3484	Day; as No. 20, 4?, &c.
3485	29 ONE; as No. 21, 21, &c.
3486	G
p. 130
3487	82 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 21.
3488	30 BECAUSE OF; aceording to the Greek. This is a sitting figure,
3489	holding the sacred whip of Osiris; and from the first syllable in
3490	his name we have acy or Ely, why. See No. 22, 31, where
3491	we give it the same meaning.
3492	31 The FOURTH YEAR. The final T makes the cardinal number
3493	into an ordinal. This is the year of the seasons, as No. 19,23,
3494	and 24.
3495	32 As DECREED. The I may be the verb of action sps. See
3496	DECrEE, No. 20, 36, &c.; and No. 31, 14, where the same
3497	auxiliary verb of action is employed.
3498	33 OтнER; K,T, CH,T, plural; KET, ЖET. Each of these
3499	words means Other; they are here joined, making a reduplicate
3500	word, in a form common in the Coptic language. The wish of
3501	the sculptor to make his inscription ornamental is here shown by
3502	his using the pyramid as one of the letters in this very unim-
3503	portant word.
3504	34 ASSEMBLIES; as No. 21,9, &e.
3505	35 BEHOLD. So we have ventured to render this at No. 19, 8, &c.
3506	36 IHOSE WHICH ARE HELD, as No. 21, 16. But here we have
3507	not got the verb of action.
3508	37 BELONGING IO; as No. 1, 8. But remark that No. 21, 14,
3509	the preposition holding the same place in a similar sentence, is an
3510	M, not an N. But the Coptic language is equally irregular in
3511	the use of its prepositions.
3512	38 SUMMER; as No. 21, 18.
3513	39 THROUGHoUr; E,M, the preposition se, as No. 21, 19. For
3514	the force of the vowel, see No. 4, 35 ; and 34, 18.
3515	40 EGYPT. See Voc. 790 and 792. The first character, when
3516	drawn more carefully, is a crocodile's tail; and thus the word
3517	Champsi, Herodotus's name for the crocodile, represents the word
3518	жнет, Egypt.
3519	41 WE SHALL HOLD; the word IOT, to which we have so often given
3520	this mneaning, preceded by T,N, the Coptic prefix TEN for the
3521	first person plural of a verb. Remark that though the Greek does
3522	not make the writer speak in the first person, yet the hieroglypbies
3523	do, not only here, but at No.19,13.
p. 131
3524	LINE 21.] EXPLANATION OF THE FIEROGLYPHICS. 83
3525	42 IN; as No. 21, 37, 8e.
3526	43 WINtER; as No. 21, 15, but here in the plural.
3527	44 In the SEASONs, according to the Greek; A,0, KEM, plural,
3528	possibly oragEl, a renewal. See No. 5, 8, where we gave the
3529	force of CHEM to the peculiar character in this word; and
3530	also No. 17, 29, and 35, where we rendered this word as Suitable;
3531	also No. 25, 41, Season.
3532	45 ComIng; A, or rather I, with S,N, for the plural ; from i, to
3533	come. See No. 3, 9. This letter with two legs is chosen in order
3534	to distinguish it as a verb relating to motion.
3535	46 LIKE; as No. 20, 34.
3536	47 What HAPPENED; as No. 19, 11, &c.
3537	48 TO COME IO PASS; as No. 19, 12, &c. Here the Greek is
3538	very exactly translated by these two words.
3539	49 OF OLD; Or ONCE UPON A TIME; as No. 21, 6.
3540	50 IN; as No. 21,14, &c.
3541	51 Here the Greek does not help to determine whether this word
3542	relates to time or place. Possibly it may mean the P'ROVINCES OF
3543	EGypr. See No. 5, 8, and 21, 44, where the two meanings both
3544	appear.
3545	Line 22.
3546	1 CHIEP; A,P,A, plural; aTE; as No. 8, 25. This helps to
3547	determine the meaning of the former word.
3548	2 BECAUSE OF THIS; as No. 16, 45, &ic.
3549	3 EVENT; as No. 8, 12, and 20, 25. See No. 7, 32, for an
3550	explanation of the difficulty in regard to this word.
3551	4 IF; as No. 20, 27; 19, 13, &c.
3552	5 Is MADE; from the auxiliary verb, as No. 12, 38.
3553	6 BEHOLD; as No. 21, 35, &c.
3554	7 DECREE OR ARRANGEMENT; as No. 20, 36 ; but made into
3555	a verb by the help of the auxiliary verb, No. 22, 5, from which it
3556	is separated by the interjection. We must translate, "If the year
3557	shall be arranged."
3558	The yeaR, that of the seasons; the Greek has evauros; but the
3559	Greek and hieroglyphics do not always agree in the use of the
3560	word.
3561	G 2
p. 132
3562	84 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 22.
3563	9 THE; as No. 20, 14, &e.
3564	10 DAX; as No. 20, 42, &e.
3565	11 THREE HUNDRED; aceording to the Greek.
3566	12 Sixry. See No. 15, 24, for these numerals.
3567	13 AND; as No. 18, 1, &e.
3568	14 FIVE DAYS; as No. 20, 6.
3569	15 NoTED, or peculiar, is the meaning that we must give to this
3570	word, which at No. 36, 6, is the Pattern marked on the holy cakes
3571	belonging to the priests. These are the days called by the
3572	Greeks the Epagomenæ. See the Calendar.
3573	16 ORDERED; as No. 16, 47, and 35, 25.
3574	17 ADDITIONAL; see No. 22, 36.
3575	18 TO BE ADDED; as No. 6, 30. M is the prefix of the infinitive
3576	mood. The first letter, the hind quarters of a lion, seems to be of
3577	the same force as the fore quarters. Compare this word and No.
3578	22, 37, each following the same word. See No. 14, 36, for this
3579	verb.
3580	19 The prefix of the infinitive mood to the next verb. See No.
3581	29,24.
3582	20 TO CELEBRATE; as No. 17, 32.
3583	21 The ADDITIONAL; as No. 22, 17, and 36.
3584	22 DAX; as No.22, 10.
3585	23 ONE, or first; as No. 21, 21, &e.
3586	24 OF; as No. 21,19, &c.
3587	25 The AssEMBLy, or festival; as No. 21, 34, &c.
3588	26 UNTO; as No. 18,33, &e.
3589	27 The GODs EUERGETA; as No. 18, 4, &e.
3590	28 AWAYFROM; SH, A, N, literally, Cyar until; but it is placed,
3591	as we should consider, too early in the sentence, and we must
3592	make use of it later. See No. 14, 11, and 21, where this pecu-
3593	liarity is explained.
3594	29 DAy; as No. 20,42.
3595	30 THat, as No. 21, 1,
3596	31 BECAUSE OF; as No. 21, 30.
3597	32 The TOURTH YEAR; as No. 21, 31.
3598	33 UnrIn; being the prefix of the case to the coming substantive,
3599	to mark it out as the word governed by the preposition Until,
p. 133
3600	LINE 22.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, 85
3601	No. 22, 28. Or this letter may be described as the latter half of
3602	No. 22, 28, here repeated.
3603	34 The ADDED; as No. 22, 17, but without the plural sign.
3604	35 FIvE DAYS; as No. 22,14.
3605	36 ADDIIIONAL; as No. 22, 34, &c. This word may be taken as
3606	the well-known Greek name for those days, the Epagomenc.
3607	which made the year of twelve months and five days. These days
3608	were added to the Egyptian year at least as early as the year
3609	в.с. 1322.
3610	37 Which were ADDED; as No. 22,18, &c.
3611	39 The NEW YEAI'S DAY; as No. 3, 16, and 22, 15.
3612	40 Upon; the preposition following its noun, as No. 12, 40. See
3613	No. 7,32.
3614	41 So that IT MAY BE MADE; F,R,E; the auxiliary verb spi, pre-
3615	ceded by of the sign of the third person singular. This F, in
3616	Coptic, is a prefix; but in the hieroglyphics it is more usually a
3617	suffix, as at No. 7,3l.
3618	42 KNowN, according to the Greek; CH, N,B. The word XNOs,
3619	to know, with B instead of F for the sign of the third person
3620	singular.
3621	43 MEN and WOMEN; as No. 10, 34.
3622	44 ALl; as No. 17, 7, Sc.
3623	45 ABOuT; as No. 15, 16, &c.
3624	46 TaIs; as No. 14, 18. These two words may be compared also
3625	to No. 16,45.
3626	47 FORMEr; N,E,T,O; from 2&TH, to precede, with N the prefix
3627	of the past tense, as at No. 20,23.
3628	48 Derecr; TH, R, ?; perhaps XOP2 a defect, the TH having the
3629	guttural force, as is not unusual.
3630	49 Of the ARRANGEMENt; literally, APPOINTED WRITING; from
3631	XW to appoint, and the character for Scribe or Writing. See
3632	No. 9, 10, for the force of the frst letter, and No. 32, 16, for the
3633	word Writing.
3634	50 IN RESPECT OF; N,T,R; NTEpE, as, when.
3635	Line 23.
3636	I The CIVIL XEARs; as No. 1, 1, &c.; those of the reign used
3637	in dates.
p. 134
3638	86 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 23.
3639	2 AND; as No. 18, 1, &e.
3640	3 The NATURAL YEAR; as No. 19, 23, &c.
3641	4 AND; as No. 18, 1, &e.
3642	5 The cormaNds; T; TarO, to tell, explained by the D.S. of
3643	a man pointing to his mouth. See No. 22, 16.
3644	6 WHICH; as No. 22, 46, &e.
3645	7 OF, or relating to; as No. 1,8, &e.
3646	8 Perhaps the Judoments; E,P,O, plural; perhaps QEN, a
3647	judgment; but this is not very satisfactory.
3648	9 OF, ol relating to; as No. 23, 7, &ie.
3649	10 The AMENDMENt; L, CH,O, plural; 2wxs to heal. The
3650	hieroglyphies make no distinetion between an L and an R.
3651	11 OF; N,E,M; NEsl; as No. 2, 10.
3652	12 The FAvLTs; T,N,B, plural; perhaps from roße a fault,
3653	with T, for the article prefixed in an unusual way. This is not
3654	wholly satisfactory, as in Coptic our word is masculine, and T is
3655	the feminine article. See No. 8,2, for the letter B.
3656	13 THe; as No. 20, 37.
3657	14 HEAVENs; as No. 20,38.
3658	15 Which HAPPENED; as No. 21, 47.
3659	16 TO COME TO PASS ; as No. 21, 48.
3660	17 BEHOLD; as No. 21, 35, and 19,8.
3661	18 The PRODUCTION Or COMMAND; as No. 22, 16, though with
3662	different characters. See No. 5, 35, for the I, or rather TAU,
3663	and No. 2,10, for the vowel E, making together TarE, to beget.
3664	19 The ADORNMENTs. From THß., a finger, we get TAßTEß
3665	adorned.
3666	20 SoLELY, or singly, as No. 9, 28.
3667	21 The ExCELLENCE; H,O; ¿oro.
3668	22 Of THe; as No. 20,14, &e.
3669	23 The GODs EUERGETE; as No. 22, 27, &c.
3670	=
3671	24 WHErEas, or literally, This, as No. 22,2, and No. 16, 45,
3672	where we have Whereas written at full, as Upon this.
3673	25 WHEN; S,K, it would seem, instead of ASK, No. 7, 30, &c.
3674	26 Adaughter; as No. 2,5.
3675	28 UNTo; H,R,N; 21pEN, as No. 11, 38. See No. 7, 32.
p. 135
3676	LINE 23.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 87
3677	29-36 KING PIOLEMY LIVING fOr EVER, BELOVED by PTHAH,
3678	AND; as No. 11, 23-30.
3679	37 QUEEN; NEB, TO; NHB, eo; Lord of the world, since there
3680	is no sign of the feminine. To the dish we gave the force of NEB
3681	at No. 5, 9; and to the latter characters the force of TO at
3682	No. 1, 10. This title NEB, seems to be allied to Neho, the
3683	name of the Babylonian god.
3684	38 BERENICE; as No. 11, 32, &c.
3685	39 The GODs DUERGETa; as No. 11, 33, &c.
3686	40 The sitting figures of the king and queen, as the D.S.
3687	41 UNIo THeM; H,T,T,O; Дaтотoy unto them. Compare
3688	No. 12, 17, and No. 18, 18; where we have the preposition
3689	witbout the final vowels, which are the personal pronoun. As the
3690	preposition is compounded of TOT a hand, the artist chooses a
3691	hand for his letter I, rather than any other form of that letter.
3692	42 BERENICE; as No. 23, 38. The young princess had the same
3693	name as her mother.
3694	43 THE; as No. 12, 30, &c.
3695	44 NAME HER. See No. 12, 25, for the word Name. The final
3696	S is the feminine pronoun suffix for Her.
3697	45 IMMEDIATELY, as is required by the Greek. See No. 14,8,
3698	and 14, 20, and 16, 21, in all of which places it bears a similar
3699	meaning.
3700	46 PROCLATMED; O,5; eecy, to proclaim.
3701	47 A queen. See No. 4,32. But bere we have not got the K
3702	of the word Hyk; and we have the indefinite article prefixed.
3703	Line 24.
3704	1 D.S. of the queen, as at No. 4, 32.
3705	2 By, preposition, as No. 22, 45, &e.
3706	3 FORTUNE Or ACCIDENI; as No. 23, 16, and 13, 24, STe.
3707	4 BEHOLD, as No. 19, 8, and 23, 17, &c.
3708	5 The GODDEss. See the word God, No. 5, 15. It has bere,
3709	instead of the masculine termination, that for the feminine, as in
3710	the queens' names.
3711	6 The same; T,N; allied to Taral, in like manner, and
3712	TENTWNS, to imitate, see Voc. 1286. Compare No. 20, 18.
3713	7 LITTLE; A,O,S,M; SyHee, little, preceded by the article,
p. 136
3714	88 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 21.
3715	whieh, according to custom, in Coptie, is joined to the adjeetive,
3716	or substantive, whichever stands first.
3717	8 WOMAN; R,N,N; peee, a man, or woman, followed by I,S,
3718	the feminine termination of the queens' names, and by the D.S.
3719	In comparing the hieroglyphies with the Coptic, the change from
3720	N to M is not unusual. See No. 19, 43.
3721	9 TAKEN AWAX; S, K,S; CEK, with a final S, which may be to
3722	make the adjective feminine. See No. 25, 31.
3723	10 UnIo, preposition; as No. 15, 37, &e.
3724	11 HEAVEN; P,I; JH, heaven, followed by the feminine article.
3725	See No. 23, 14.
3726	12 WHiLsi; M,S, CH, CH,T; a word which we may very satis-
3727	faetorily support by comparing it to CADHT, lower, and
3728	caDorN, within; having au M for the prefix.
3729	13 The PRIESTs; as No. 1, 24, &ie.
3730	14 Who bad comt; as No. 3, 9, where in the same way a character
3731	with legs was chosen as figurative of motion, aud to distinguish
3732	this word from others of the same letters.
3733	15 From the coUNTeX; as No. 1, 10, &c.
3734	16 NEAR; CH,R; EДpHI, within. See No. 35, 13.
3735	17 The KINg; as No. 1, 12, and 13, &e.
3736	18 His PRESENCE; N,R,O, plural; sspwos, the mouths. The
3737	Mouth, in Coptic is used for He himself.
3738	19 YEArLY, literally, year; as No. 22, 8.
3739	20 REmaInIng, according to the Greek, M,E,B,T, with D.S. of a
3740	house. M may be a prefix, and EJEßT is to rise; but this will
3741	hardly help to support our rendering.
3742	21 In the PRESENCE, as No. 24, 18, but rathered shortened in the
3743	number of letters, as is not unusual when a word is used a second
3744	time in the sentenee. See No. 6, 30, where these same letters
3745	are the prefix of the imperfeet tense.
3746	22 Of HIs MAJESTY; as No. 3, 18, &c.
3747	23 CELEBraTIng, is the meaning here required, though at
3748	No. 12, 5, we considered this word a pronoun. The first letter,
3749	EI, may represent dids, to magnify, or it may be made to stand
3750	for the word IOT, of No. 18, 31, &e. See No. 29, 13, where
3751	we must give the same meaning to the single letter.
p. 137
3752	LINE 24.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 89
3753	24 THE; using the heavens for a P, from JH, the heavens. This
3754	is as remarkable a use of a character as what we saw at No. 21, 30,
3755	where the figure of Osiris was used for Because of. .
3756	25 GHEAT; aceording to the Greek; R, CHI,I ; which drives us to
3757	the rather unreasonable conjeeture that the sculptor has reversed
3758	the order of the letters, and that they are meant for Xups, great,
3759	with I the feminine article, as No. 4, 2. We made the same bold
3760	conjeeture at No. 8, 26; and at No. 2, 7, it was certainly the ease
3761	in the name of Philammon.
3762	26 LAMENTAIIoN, literally, Cutting; SH, I; SyET, to cut. The
3763	custom of gashing the flesh in grief was common in Egypt, aud
3764	deprives this rendering of any improbability. It is deseribed
3765	by Herodotus in lib. II., 61. For the force of our first letter see
3766	No. 1,31 ; 5, 16; and 16, 34.
3767	27 THE; as No. 20, 14, &c.
3768	28 PRAISES; A,E; from didl, to praise, as No. 7, 1. Compare
3769	No. 24, 23.
3770	29 HE, but meaning They; as No. 4,37.
3771	30 Perhaps FINDIng; H; 2E to find. The Greek has "Think-
3772	ing it right." Perhaps we must understand our word as Con-
3773	sidering. This character is common as 2E, like; see No. 16,
3774	40, &e..
3775	31 Abour, or Upon; as No. 13, 22, &c. See No. 7, 32, for an
3776	explanation of this word.
3777	32 PATICULARS; at No. 9, 28, and 23, 20, this is rendered
3778	Single things.
3779	33 HE, meaning They; as No. 21,29, &e.
3780	34 AsKED; ?,H,O, with D.S. of a man holding up his hands in
3781	the act of prayer; probably, T2O, to ask. The lessusual Coptic
3782	letter is naturally represented by an unusual eharacter.
3783	35 FRom; as No. 4, 3. See also No. 2, 10, for this compound
3784	charaeter.
3785	36 The rIng, here described by only one of his two titles. See
3786	No. 1,12, and 13. The figure placed as D.S. bolds in his hand
3787	the whip carried by Osiris, as if it were in his eharacter as a god
3788	that he undertook to deelare lis infant daughter a goddess.
3789	37 AND; as No. 23, 36, &tc.
p. 138
3790	90 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYFHICS. [LINE 24.
3791	38 QUEEN; as No. 4,32, and with tae same D.S.
3792	39 THE; as No. 23,43, &c.
3793	40 GIrTs; as No. 5, 35. But here either the termination is
3794	incomplete, or it is in a less usual form. See, however, Voc.
3795	401 for the same. It is probable that, as the whole sentence is
3796	written by the help of the ear, without any attempt to spell
3797	grammatically, the N of the plural termination is dropt, because
3798	the following word begins with an M. For other cases of the
3799	same kind, see No. 7, 5; 18, 12; and 32, 4, in all of which it is
3800	doubtful whether the M holds the place of a final N, or of a
3801	preposition following the word in which the N has been dropt.
3802	41 FROM; as No. 21,27, 8c.
3803	42 THEM; as No. 9,4.
3804	43 To GRANT; the word Give preceded by R,R, which may be
3805	E2pHs the preposition, as we interpret the double R, at No. 10,
3806	26; and 20,24; and may thus form part of the verb.
3807	Line 25.
3808	1 TO CONSECRATE; O,T,P; OrOTEß. See Voc. 438. This word
3809	forms the end of many Egyptian names, such as Amunothph,
3810	dedicated to Amun; and Mandothph, dedicated to Mandoo.
3811	2 AGODDESS; as No. 24, 5.
3812	3 The SAME; I,N; TENTWN, to imitate; as No. 24, 6.
3813	4 LIKE; ¿E like; though more often used in this inscription as
3814	a2aand.
3815	5 OsIrIs. The Egyptian sculptors take some liberties, for pic-
3816	torial reasons, when writing this word. The hatchet is God. The
3817	throne is ISI, as in the name of the goddess Isis. The eye is
3818	used for R, instead of the mouth, and in this word only. In every
3819	other word the eye is a vowel, as in the name Arsinoe, and at
3820	No. 12, 5; and 14, 1, and 15, 20, and 16,22, and 17,33, &c. But
3821	in order, probably, to represent the eye of providence, the sculptor
3822	here uses it instead of the mouth. It forms the word of action
3823	ips, while the ISI is wy, to declare. Hence the name Osiris,
3824	a Judgment-maker, or Judge, a that of the Cabeiri gods means
3825	Punishment-makers, from KBa, to punish.
3826	6 IN; as No. 18, 40 &c.
p. 139
3827	LINE 20.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 91
3828	7 TEMPLE; as No. 4,9.
3829	8 Or; as No. 1,8, &tc.
3830	9 CANOPUS, according to the Greek; P,K,O,I, followed by the
3831	feminine article, and D.S. of a city. But this reading of the
3832	letters is given in the belief that the second letter should have
3833	been like the K in No. 6, 3; whereas it too much resembles the
3834	N in No. 6, 30. See No. 4, 14.
3835	10 WHICH; as No. 22, 3.
3836	I1 Among; a compound preposition, formed of M, el, in, and
3837	N,E,N; sigorN, within. Sce No. 25, 34
3838	12 The TEMPLES; as No. 5, 4, &e.
3839	13 PRINCIPaL, according to the Greek; literally, RoxaL; as No.
3840	26,15, and No. 37,24, where its meaning is very certainly proved.
3841	But see also No. 8, 21 and No. 13,48, where it of necessity bears
3842	a very different meaning. Having the original foree of EpwUTE,
3843	milk, it here means Orpo, royal, and there EporoT, happiness.
3844	14 FoR wHIch, two words, as No. 16, 45, &c.
3845	15 ExPENSE; S,O; 60, as No. 25, 18.
3846	16 GREAT; as No. 4, 2 ; 5, 2; &c.
3847	17 Of the HGYPTIANS. See No. 8, 31, &e. where this word is
3848	spelt with fewer letters. This is perhaps the adjeetive, not Copts,
3849	but Coptic, in the plural.
3850	18 ExPNsE; as No. 25, 15.
3851	19 FoR THEM; M,T,T; of which M is the preposition, and TT
3852	is TOT the hand. In Coptic it is written with an N, NTOTOX,
3853	literally, For their hand; but the pronoun at the end of the word
3854	is omitted, as we must suppose, in carelessness.
3855	20 Was PREPARED, as No. 5, 11, and 30, 38.
3856	21 Br; as No. 25, 8, with a different meaning. But the Coptic
3857	use of the prepositions is very irregular.
3858	22 The KIng; as No. 24, 36.
3859	23 AND; as No. 4, 31, &c., where it is rendered Likewise.
3860	24 The LIVING MEN and WOMEN; as No. 7,20, &e.
3861	25 OF; as No. 11, 17, &c.
3862	26 The Country; as 24, 15, &c.
3863	=
p. 140
3864	92 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 25.
3865	27 IN or during; as No. 21,7, &e.
3866	28 The TIMEs; as No. 11,7, &c.
3867	29 The auxiliary verb; A,R; sps; as No. 22,5. It is part of
3868	the coming verb.
3869	30 BEHOLD, as No. 22,6, &c.
3870	31 SHALL DRAW; S,K; CEK, as at No. 24, 9. It is separated
3871	from its auxiliary verb, No. 25,29, by the word Behold. Without
3872	the auxiliary verb it might be a substantive.
3873	32 Perhaps Our; T,O,N; owrt, our. It is the adjective to the
3874	foregoing word, which thus becomes, " We shall draw."
3875	33 OsIRIs; as No. 25, 5.
3876	34 DURING Or AMONG; as No. 25, 11.
3877	35 The DRAWING ALONG; S,K; CEK, as No. 25, 31. The final
3878	TT may be TOT, a hand, a word so often used as a preposition,
3879	and here it may correspond to our Along.
3880	36 The Bargi, represented pictorially. The procession of men
3881	drawing along the statues of the gods in a barge on the Nile,
3882	may be seen on the sarcophagus, Egypt. Inscrip. pl. 28.
3883	37 To, a preposition; as No. 25, 27, &c.
3884	38 The TEMPLI; as No. 25,7.
3885	39 SAME; as No. 24, 6; being an adjective to the word which it
3886	follows.
3887	40 AT or ON; as No. 25,27, &c.
3888	41 The SEAsoN, as No. 21, 20, &c.
3889	42 OF; as No. 23, 7, &e.
3890	43 The YEAR; as No. 1, 1, &c.
3891	44 FroM; as No. 20,9.
3892	45 The TEMPLE; as . No. 25, 38; but without the D.S. which
3893	follows it, and seems very unnecessary to a character which is
3894	itself pietorial.
3895	46 WuIcH; as No. 23, 6, though with different characters. The
3896	T being below the N is considered as following it.
3897	47 HERACLEIUM, according to the Greek. The town of Hera-
3898	eleopolis, near which this temple was situated, was in the middle
3899	of Egypt, and was near the town, or perhaps was the same town
3900	as that which was fortified by the Ptolemies, and called Ptolemais.
p. 141
3901	LINE 25.J EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 93
3902	It was within a few miles of Oxyrynchus, where the fish was
3903	worshipped; and this helps to explain the hieroglyphical name
3904	where we see a fish among the characters. The first three letters
3905	are A,N,R, or more probably A, CH,R, as these two characters are
3906	easily mistaken; xup!, great, the Egyptian name for Hereules.
3907	The next letter, B, may represent such a word as ABO, city; as
3908	we judge from the names of many Egyptian cities. Thus Bu-
3909	bastis is the city of Pasht; Bu-siris is the city of Osiris. The
3910	two otber letters, M,R, may be the uame of the sacred fish. Or
3911	the M may be the prefix of the case, and R alone the word Fish.
3912	Line 26.
3913	1 ON or in; as No. 25, 6.
3914	2 The month of CaoIac, the fourth in the Egyptian civil year; and
3915	therefore, when the Calendar was arranged, B.c. 1322, and when it
3916	again became right in a.D. 138, it hegan on our 16th of October.
3917	At this time, however, when Payni, the tenth month, began on the
3918	19th of July, Choiac of the civil year began on the 20th of
3919	January. See the Calendar.
3920	3 TWENTY-NINE; the numerals, as No. 15, 42. This day, the day
3921	of the ceremony of the water procession on the Nile, was probably
3922	the time of the priests' assembling at Canopus; and the Decree
3923	probably means by this month, not the Choiac of the civil year,
3924	but of the reformed calendar which the priests are now proposing
3925	to introduce. The 29th of Choiac was eighteen days before the
3926	17th of Tybi, when the Decree was issued.
3927	4 THE EGxPTIaNs; as No. 8, 31, but preceded by the article.
3928	Instead of this, the Greek has The priests of the course.
3929	5 Of the TEMPLEs; as No. 25, 12, &c.
3930	6 PRINcIPal; as No. 25, 13, and No. 26, 15, where the Greek
3931	supports this meaning.
3932	7 AT; as No. 25, 27, &c.
3933	8 The TIMEs; as No. 25,28, &e. It ends with plural letters,
3934	S,N.
3935	9 THE; as No. 23, 43, &c.; or perhaps THey, as No. 24, 29, if
3936	the following word is a verb.
3937	10 COMPLETE THE SACRIFICES; E,I,K, for AIK, a dedication; and
p. 142
3938	94 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 26.
3939	R,R, the auxiliary verb of action, sps; and followed by a burning
3940	censer, the D.S. See No. 32, 43.
3941	11 THE; as No. 24,39, &c.
3942	12 ALIARs; SH, E,O; syHors, followed by the D.S. See
3943	No.20,15.
3944	13 Of; as No. 25, 25, &c.
3945	14 The TEmPlEs; as No. 25, 12, &c.
3946	15 PrINcIPal, so rendered in the Greek. See No. 25, 13, and
3947	37, 24.
3948	16 THe; as No. 26, 11, &c.
3949	17 ONE HALF OF THE COURSE, according to the Greek. This is
3950	probably some standard carried in the procession of the priests;
3951	at the top is an ostrich feather.
3952	18 THE OTHER HALF OF THE COURSE; perhaps a similar standard.
3953	19 OF; as No. 26, 1, &c.
3954	20 Perhaps FamıLy; in the Greek, course. But whether is thereby
3955	meant the procession or the tribe of priests is doubtful. The
3956	letters are CH, F,T. The T may be the feminine article. The
3957	word xHg, like the Hebrew Sxa, means at once the Avenger,
3958	Redeemer, and Next of Kin; and as the priesthood in Egypt was
3959	hereditary, it may well be rendered Family. See No. 34, 51.
3960	Compare also No. 8, 17.
3961	21 The meaning Those; as No. 26,9,&e.
3962	22 Or; as No 22,33, &e.
3963	23 TEMPLE; as No. 25, 7, &c.
3964	24 THAT SAME; as No. 24, 6, &c.
3965	25 MINGLING Or JOINING; M,O, CH,1; MOrXT, mixed. The
3966	Greek, мєта бе таuта, which should mean After this, may have
3967	been understood by thie Egyptian scribe to mean Jointly with this.
3968	26 In this not uncommon word Dr. Reinisch's copy has the twigs,
3969	with four leaves on each; but I correct it with confidence, and
3970	adopt Dr. Lepsius's reading. The twig with four leaves is S, from
3971	OE a plant, as at No. 1, 12, &c. The twig with two leaves is O,
3972	perhaps from OKE, AKE, &XI, a reed, as at No. 11, 1, and
3973	No. 33, 15. This word O,0,N,N, I read in other inscriptions as
3974	orwirs shining; see Voc.658; but here it may mean HARPs,
3975	as that Coptic word lias this second meaning also.
p. 143
3976	LINE 26.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROOLYPHICS. 95
3977	27 ALL the OTHER; see No. 16, 27, Sc., Other; and No. 16,
3978	28, &c., All.
3979	28 RELIQIOUS CEREMONIES; as No. 20, 22, and 22, 20, &c.
3980	For; as No.25, 42.
3981	30 • The CELEBRATIONs; as No. 19, 33, but with the omission of a
3982	vowel, and the addition of the plural sign. It is not unusual,
3983	when a word is often repeated, to find fewer letters in the later
3984	examples.
3985	31 DEDICATION; as No. 26, 10, but written with fewer letters, as
3986	explained above.
3987	32 HER RAISING UP; EI, N,S; from irs to raise, with s, the
3988	feminine pronoun.
3989	33 The GODDEss; or literally, God, as we have no feminine termi-
3990	nation. The D.S. is of a woman, as No. 24, 8, &c.
3991	34 Probably MADE FOR HER; T,R,S; the TR means TPO, to make,
3992	and the S, the feminine termination, may be for her. This is not
3993	wholly satisfactory, but it seems confirmed at No. 28, 48, and
3994	29, 15. But see No. 36, 24, where TR is translated All.
3995	35 Probably LIBATION, Or PURIFICATION; the character which we
3996	have so often rendered Priest. This character, when it means a
3997	Libation, should be followed by the D.S. of water. See Voc. 347,
3998	353, and 361.
3999	36 To HEAL; S,N; CHINI; as No. 29, 17.
4000	37 The GRIEF FOR HEr; in Coptic elka 2. This may be explained
4001	if we suppose the locks of hair to be Ka&!, the head. The final
4002	S may be the feminine pronoun, to make it Grief for her, as
4003	No. 29, 18. But see No. 22, 48, where the lock of hair seems to
4004	be an H.
4005	38 HER BAISING UP; as No. 26, 32.
4006	Line 27.
4007	1 They PREPARED; as No. 5, Il; though here we have an R
4008	more than in the former place. It may perhaps be the preposition,
4009	possibly for.
4010	2 THEY, or THEM; as No. 9,4.
4011	3 WITH; as No. 26, 19, &c.
4012	* PERSEVERANCE; S,B,I; CEPCJE, to persevere.
p. 144
4013	96 EXPLANATION OF THE HIDROGLYPHICS. [LINE 27.
4014	5 Possibly CARE, as such a meaning is here required. It may be
4015	a flame of fire, as at No. 26, 10; and the word wyad, is both
4016	Flame and Care.
4017	6 LIke; as No. 16, 40. But see No. 24, 30, where we find this
4018	letter with a different meaning.
4019	7 The CBRENONIES, Or PREPARATION, Or some such meaning, is
4020	here needed; but the Greek does not help us.
4021	8 THE; as No. 23, 43, &c. Here the scribe follows the Greek so
4022	closely that he puts the article before Apis, and not before Mnevis.
4023	9 APIS THE BULL; as No. 5, 26.
4024	10 MNEVIS THE BuLL; as No. 5, 27.
4025	11 CELEBRATED; as No. 24, 23.
4026	12 It was DETERMINED, S,M,M,M; CreleE, to declare.
4027	13 THERE WAS GIVEN; N,R,T,I; the word to Give, as No. 5, 35,
4028	preceded by NRT, a prefix for the imperfect tense, which we may
4029	support by the Coptic, NEpETEN, of the second person plural.
4030	14 Bror uPoN; as No. 13, 22, and 24, 31, Stc.
4031	15 CoMMAND; I, with D.S. of à man speaking; perbaps Ta3O,
4032	as No. 23,5.
4033	16 HoNoUrs. See No. 5, 13, where we supposed that Colossal
4034	Statues were the honours meant. The final TN is in place of the
4035	more usual SN.
4036	17 Immorral; as No. 1, 16, &c. The adjective follows its sub-
4037	stantive.
4038	18 UNTO; as No. 26, 22, &c.
4039	19 The QueEn; as No. 4,32; but having also the final s, the
4040	feminine termination. This title, given to one who died in infancy,
4041	would be more suitably rendered Princess; but with the Greeks
4042	of Alexandria the words Baoiseus and Baoiiora were given
4043	to the members of the royal family, without any reference to
4044	sovereignty over a state.
4045	20 BERENICE; as No. 23, 12.
4046	21 The DAUGHTER; as No. 23, 26.
4047	22 OF; as No. 27, 18, &Tc.
4048	23 The GODS EVERGETA; as No. 23, 23, &c.
p. 145
4049	LINE 27.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 97
4050	24 IN; as No. 5,3, &c.
4051	25 T'he TEMPLEs; as No. 5,4, &c.
4052	26 Or; as No. 5,5, &c.
4053	27 The couNIrY; as No. 5, 6, &c.
4054	28 Attbe TIMEs; as No. 26, 8; but with the article, and without
4055	the preposition before it.
4056	29 Ar; as No. 26,7, and 25, 27, &c.
4057	30 WHICH; as No. 23, 6, &c.
4058	31 ONCE UPON A TIME; as No. 8,20, and 21, 49, &c.
4059	32 Probably, She was TAKEN Ur. In No. 24, 9, we have what
4060	seems to be this word written S,K,S; here we have the K
4061	omitted. The figure of the bird, and the sense required, lead us
4062	to conjecture that this is an omission caused by accident, or haste.
4063	See also No. 28, 3, for the same word without the feminine pro-
4064	noun postfixed.
4065	33 AMonG; E,M,M, or M,E,MI; probably eeEN, with; the M
4066	being used for N, as is not unusual.
4067	34 The GoDs; as No. 5, 15; but here we bave the plural formed,
4068	not by repeating the word, but by three dots.
4069	35 IN; as No. 27, 24, &c.
4070	36 The month of TrBi; as No. 1,6.
4071	37 The moNta in which; as No. 3, 24.
4072	Line 28.
4073	Ra, the Sun, the great god of Thebes; R,E; pH.
4074	HIMsELF; P,O; literally, The one; M the article and Ora, one.
4075	3 Tooк ur; as No. 24,9.
4076	4 The DAUGHTEr of Ra. See No. 27, 21, Daughter; in addition
4077	to which, we have the figure of the sun, ornamented with a sacred
4078	asp. In Wilkinson's Materia Hierog. I. ix. we have an inscrip-
4079	tion in honour of this goddess: " Hecate, the illustrious daughter
4080	of Ra." The name Hecate, is the feminine of ZIK, a sorcerer,
4081	and is spelt with the D.S. of our No. 35, 7, preceded with I, the
4082	feminine article. The word Illustrious is uur No. 26, 26.
4083	5 To; as No. 24, 10; 27,29, &c.
4084	THE HEAVeNs; as No. 24, Il; but here we have the article
4085	prefixed to the noun, as No. 20, 37, and 38.
4086	H
p. 146
4087	98 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 28.
4088	7 Is CELEBRATED; as No. 3, 19, and No. 28, 43. The final I
4089	is the suffix of the third person singular.
4090	8 Wao; as No. 16, 8, and No. 28, G, where it is used as the
4091	article.
4092	9 UNro HIM; H,I,F; ZaTEg.
4093	10 SHE WAs; N,S; NEC, being in Coptic used as a prefix to the
4094	word Named, which is to follow.
4095	11 The APPLE OF THE EYE, expressed pictorially.
4096	12 AND; H; aga.
4097	13 THE; N,T; NET, who, but only in the plural. It is here used
4098	for ПET.
4099	14 SACRED Asp, being the figure of the asp, which was tied by a
4100	ribband as an ornament to the forehead of the kings and statues
4101	of the gods. In the Greek it is called the Diadem, or Crown.
4102	15 OF; as No. 27,24, &c.
4103	16 His HEAD; the animal's head is followed by T, the feminine
4104	article to the word dME head; and then by F, the pronoun His.
4105	17 THE; as No. 23, 43, &c.
4106	18 HER NAME; as No. 23, 44. Thus the words The her name,
4107	seem treated as a verb, and with the prefix No.28, 10, become
4108	She was named.
4109	19 THe; as No.28,17, &c.
4110	20 BELOVED; M,R; elepe, to love. See No. 2, 13, for this
4111	form of M.
4112	21 This sitting figure of a man, with his hand to his mouth, must
4113	here be held to be symbolical of kissing, following, as it does, tbe
4114	word Beloved. At No. 27, 15, &c., it was the D.S. of speaking.
4115	22 Br; as No. 26,29, &c.
4116	23 HER FATHER. Compare No. A, 4, Father, which is there
4117	written with three letters instead of our single F, and followed
4118	by His, instead of Her. The writer would seem in many places
4119	to use fewer letters in each word, towards the latter part of the
4120	inseription, than he did towards the beginning.
4121	24 They shall CELEBRATE; as No. 21,36; 21,41, &c.
4122	25 Unro, preposition; as No. 28, 22, &c.
4123	26 HER; being a suffix to the preposition, as at No. 28, 23.
p. 147
4124	LINE 28.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 99
4125	27 AsSEMBLIES; as No. 21, 34, &c.
4126	28 By, or wirH, preposition; as No. 28, 22, &c.
4127	29 WATER PROCESSION, represented pictorially by a pair of arms
4128	holding an oar. In the Rosetta Stone a similar character means
4129	Sculptured or a Statue, as the arms are then supposed to hold a
4130	chisel.
4131	30 IN, FROM, Or UNIO; preposition, as No. 28, 15, &c.
4132	31 The SANCTUARY; or inner room of a temple; as No. 16, 32.
4133	32 GREAT, in the plural; as No. 5, 2, &ic.
4134	33 The GREATER PART, according to the Greek; CH, T; KWTE
4135	fulness, or perhaps simply KET, the others, as it is translated at
4136	No. 30, 7.
4137	34 Of the TeMPLes. This is the word No. 25, 12, written with
4138	another form of the M, and repeated three times, instead of being
4139	followed by three dots. These three words, Great, fulness, temples,
4140	are the rude translation of Taeoow ispors. Such a comparison
4141	of the two shows that the Greek was the original, and the Hiero-
4142	glyphics the translation,
4143	35 OF THE TIRST RANI; as No. 25, 13, &c.
4144	36 IN; preposition, as No. 28, 15, &c.
4145	37 MontH; a moon, followed R,E, for the D.S. of time, as
4146	No. 17, 6, but with the omission of two of the. letters. As the
4147	words become repeated, they are written in shorter form.
4148	38 THAT; as No. 22, 30, 8c.
4149	39 When the makIng; some part of ips, to make, as at No. 17, 33,
4150	and 18, 25, &c.
4151	40 A GoDDEsS; as No. 26, 33, and without the feminine termina-
4152	tion to the word.
4153	41 Or; as No. 28, 22, &c.
4154	42 The QUEEN. The word is composed of the sceptre which forms
4155	part of No. 1, 11, Reign; and of No. 3, 18, His Majesty; and
4156	this is followed by S, the feminine termination, or pronoun, and
4157	the D.S. of a woman.
4158	43 Is CELEBRATED; as No. 28, 7, and No. 29, 19.
4159	44 In ADDITION; as No. 15, 3; and as No. 14, 35, and 36, in a
4160	fuller form.
4161	H 2
p. 148
4162	100 EXPLANATION OF THI HIEROGLYPHICS, [LINE 28.
4163	45 There SHALL BE CELEBRATED; as No. 17,32, and 33, where,
4164	however, it is written with several more letters.
4165	46 An ASSEMBIX; as No. 28, 27, &e.
4166	47 ONE; as No. 19, 39, &c.
4167	48 There SHALL BE MADE; T,R; TPO, to make; as No. 26, 34.
4168	But see No. 18, 8, where these letters are the word THp, all.
4169	49 A WATER PROCESSION; as No. 28, 29.
4170	50 ONE; as No. 28, 47.
4171	51 UNIO; as No. 28, 25, &.c.
4172	52 QUIEN; as No. 27, 19, 8c.
4173	53 BERENICE; as No. 27, 20, &c.
4174	54 DAUGHIER; as No. 27, 21.
4175	Line 29.
4176	1 Or; as No. 27, 22.
4177	2 The GODs EUERGETa; as No. 27, 23, &c.
4178	3 IN; as No. 27, 24, &c.
4179	4 The TEMPLEs; as No. 27, 25, &c.
4180	5 Or; as No. 27, 26, &c.
4181	6 The Iwo regIons, meaning Upper and Lower Egypt, as at
4182	No. 10, 44; and No. 18, 7; but here, after the name has been
4183	written several times, the D.S. is thought sufficient.
4184	7 IN; as No. 26,7, &c.
4185	8 The TImEs; as No. 26, 8, &c.
4186	9 OF; as No. 29,3, &c.
4187	10 The month of TxBr; as No. 27, 36.
4188	11 From; SH, A,N; yaN, when.
4189	12 The SEVENTEETH DAX; the numerals, as No. 15, 42, preceded
4190	by the D.S. for Time, instead of the word Day.
4191	13 Probably wAs KEPT or celebrated. The Eye here seems used
4192	for the whole word, No. 28, 24, which has been so often written,
4193	that now it is thought enough to carve the first letter only.
4194	See the abridgment at No. 28, 45, where the same first letter
4195	is used for a different word. See No. 24, 23, for the same
4196	difficulty.
4197	14 HER WATER PROCESSION; as No. 28, 49. The final S may be
4198	Her.
p. 149
4199	LINE 29.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 101
4200	15 Was MADE for HER; as No. 26, 34; and as No. 28, 48,
4201	without the pronoun.
4202	16 A LIBATION Or PURIFICATION; as No. 26, 35.
4203	17 To HEAL; as No. 26, 36.
4204	18 GRIEF FOR HER; as No. 26, 37.
4205	19 WAS CELEBRATED; as No. 19, 42, &C.
4206	20 As ON THE DAY, is the meaning here required. The last
4207	character is the D.S. for Dar. The letters M,S,E, may be a
4208	preposition.
4209	21 FIRsT; literally, the Head; A,P; aлe, a head.
4210	22 DURING; OUB, I,RO. A compound preposition, OrßE,
4211	through, and R, as No. 26, 7. The first character usually repre-
4212	sents Oraß, good, haly. See No. 14, I.
4213	23 FOUR DAYs; see No. 22, 35.
4214	=
4215	24 TO SET UP; M, the prefix of the infinitive mood, as at No. 17,
4216	32; T,O,T, TOYWT, an image; followed by S, which may be
4217	the feminine sign, as it is the statue of the princess; and ending
4218	with the D.S. of something erected. At No. 22, 19, and 20, this
4219	word, without the D.S., is rendered to celebrate.
4220	25 A SACRED STATUE; being the word God, the systrum, or
4221	musical instrument, which the statue is to hold, and the D.S. of
4222	a woman, as it is to be the statue of a woman.
4223	26 UNTo; as No. 29, 1, &c.
4224	27 The godDess; as No. 26, 33, but with the addition of the
4225	usual feminine termination, which is there wanting.
4226	28 The saME; as No. 26, 24; the adjective following its substan-
4227	-
4228	tive.
4229	29 Or; as No. 29, 3, &ic.
4230	30 GoLD; being an ornamental dish or basket in which gold rings
4231	are carried by men bringing tribute to the King in the sculptures
4232	of Thothmosis III. Moreover, at No. 5, 9, we showed that a
4233	dish was NEB, and hence represented NOYB, gold.
4234	31 POLISHED; H,M; Qwee, to polish. This may describe the
4235	precious stones. On the other hand, it might be taken as tro
4236	words, H, and, and M, of.
p. 150
4237	102 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 29.
4238	32 STONES; SH, I; WOT, hard, followed by the D.S. of a stone.
4239	See No. 1, 31, for the foree of the first letter.
4240	33 ALL; as No. 5, 23.
4241	34 Afigure of the statue, whieh has been deseribed. We might sup-
4242	pose the final S was added because it was the statue of a woman;
4243	but we have the same final S following the same figure where the
4244	statue is that of a king. There, however, it is deseribed as a portable
4245	statue, as this, which was to be made of gold, of course was. Henee
4246	that final S belongs to some word which so describes the kind of
4247	image. See Rosetta Stone, line 8.
4248	35 IN; as No. 29,3.
4249	36 The TEMPLes; as No. 27, 25. Compare No. 28, 34. There
4250	each charaeter is repeated three times; bere one only is so
4251	repeated, the other has the three dots.
4252	37 Of FIRST RANK; compare No. 29, 40.
4253	38 IN; as No. 29, 35, &e.
4254	39 The TEMPLEs; as No. 29, 36, or rather as No. 28, 34.
4255	40 Of SECOND RANK.
4256	41 AT; as No. 29, 7, &e.
4257	A2 The TIMes; as No. 29, 8, &e.
4258	43 This word, R,T,E, seems to be the auxiliary verb ope with the
4259	letters in a different order, and thus it forms part of the following
4260	word, as No. 37, 16. But see No. 11, 13, where we render it a
4261	Reason.
4262	Line 30.
4263	1 TO CONSECRATE; M,T,E, FO; eET TOYBO, purity, and witb
4264	the foregoing auxiliary verb, to purify.
4265	2 IN; as No. 29, 38, &e.
4266	3 The HOLY PLACE; &u rwdyw, that is probably in the temple
4267	proper, or house, as opposed to the temple-yard, whieh is
4268	what is usually meant in this Deeree by the word Temple.
4269	The Greek distinguisbes between the ispov, or temple-yard,
4270	ineluding the House; the ayov, the huly building or house;
4271	and the adurov, the inner chamber, the sanetuary, or holy of
4272	holies.
4273	4 The PRIEST; as No. 2, 19; followed by the D.S.
p. 151
4274	LINE 30.] DXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 108
4275	5 The PROPHET, being the adjective to the foregoing substantive;
4276	R,O,E; from pw, a mouth.
4277	6 The sacred BARGE, but possibly meaning another person, the
4278	priest of the barge, as a number of priests are here mentioned.
4279	7 The orHER; CH, T; KET, other. See No. 28, 33; also
4280	No. 3,5, for another form of the word.
4281	8 PRIESTS; as No. 1, 24, &c.
4282	9 CHOsEN; as No. 15, 26 ; though there we have an M as a prefix.
4283	10 Of the PURIFICATIONs, as represented by the fire and water. See
4284	No. 16, 23; and also No. 2, 21, where it seems to mean priests of
4285	the libations, and is without the D.S. of water.
4286	I1 GREAT; as No. 25, 16, &c.; the adjective to the foregoing
4287	substantive.
4288	12 The indefinite article to the following substantive; as No. 5,
4289	7, &c.; or, possibly, AND; as No. 2,3, &c.
4290	13 Those who sING PRAISES; as No. 2, 22.
4291	14 Of the GoDs; as No. 27, 34.
4292	15 THOSE WHO ROBE THE GODS; as No. 3, 2.
4293	16 HE SHALL TAKE OF CARRY; S, MES,A,F; from redey, to take,
4294	with s the prefix of the future tense, as at No. 20, 39, and
4295	21,4, &c.; and with I' the suffix of the third person singular.
4296	That the first character is MES, see the name of Meshophra
4297	Thothmosis I., called Mesaphris by Manetho; also the weil-
4298	known title over a king's second name of Lord of Battles, from
4299	reacy, to strike, translated by Hermapion as Brave in War. It
4300	is the picture of seHcy, an anvil.
4301	17 IT; the article, which we have only seen used in the nominative
4302	case; but at No. 34, 10, it is used for Her, in the okjective case.
4303	18 In HIS TWO ARMS; H,P,T; QПWT a measure of length from
4304	finger to finger when the arms are stretched out.
4305	19 The D.S. to the foregoing word. In other places in this
4306	inscription this character means Fortune or Accident, No. 8, 16,
4307	and 13, 24, &c. This perhaps may be explaiued by supposing
4308	that the resemblance between ZnwT, the two arms, and ZWTT,
4309	to fall down, or happen, was ncar enough to allow one to represent
4310	the other.
p. 152
4311	104 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPRICS. [LINE 30.
4312	20 So that it MAY BE SEEN; see No. 37, 18, where it is rendered
4313	Conspicuous in the Greek.
4314	21 ON or in; as No. 30, 2, where the Mi is of another form.
4315	22 The DAX; as at No. 29, 23, &c.
4316	23 Or; as No. 28,41, &e.
4317	24 The TaKINg up or carrying out; as No. 30, 16, but with the
4318	grammatical prefix and suffx. In the frreek we have the Going
4319	out, meaning the going out of the statues of the gods, which is
4320	here called the Carrying out.
4321	25 AND; as No. 25, 4, &c.
4322	26 ASSEMBLIIs; as No. 28, 46, &c.
4323	OF; as No. 29,5, &e.
4324	28 The GoD, the singular of No. 30, 14. The god meant may be
4325	Osiris, by the side of whose statue that of the princess was to be
4326	placed; but the Greek has The other gods; and in the Hiero-
4327	glyphies the singular is often used for the plural.
4328	29 IN; as No. 29,7, &c.
4329	30 The TImes; as No. 29,8, &c.
4330	31 Bx; as No. 18, 44; 22, 45, &c.
4331	32 THIs; as No. 18,45; 22,46, &c.
4332	33 SEBN, according to the Greek; but the force of the character
4333	is uncertain.
4334	34 By ALI; N,E,B; S1B8, as No. 37, 32.
4335	35 MEN and women; as No. 7, 26, &c.
4336	36 All; as No. 20, 21, &c., but with the addition of S,N, for the
4337	plural. This is the adjective to the foregoing substantive, not-
4338	withstanding the word by which it is preceded.
4339	37 WorsHIP; represented by a man throwing himself on the
4340	ground.
4341	38 Is IO BE PAID; as No. 5, 11 and 25, 20. Here our word
4342	begins with M, the prefix of the infinitive mood, and ends with F,
4343	the pronoun.
4344	39 Perhaps AT ONCE, literally, endeavouring or putling out the hand;
4345	H,T,O,T; 2ITOT; as No. 13, 15, and 18, 18, and 12, 17. This
4346	word seems often to be almost an unnecessary expletive, that only
4347	adds emphasis. See No. 36,9, where it is also redundant.
p. 153
4348	LINE 30.] EXPLANATION OF THE HILROGLYPHICS. 105
4349	40 UNro; as No. 27, 22, &c.
4350	41 The DISTINGUISHED OF CONSPICUOUs; as No. 20, 26, &c.
4351	42 BERENICE; as No. 28, 53, &c.
4352	Line 31.
4353	1 How, or in like manner; H,N,A, ZINa or Zirrar.
4354	2 Ihe QUEEN; being the D.S. of a woman, as throughout in this
4355	inscription, and not distinguished by any mark of royalty from
4356	the next D.S.
4357	3 Of WoMEN; as No. 24,8.
4358	4 IS CARRIED OUT; as No. 30, 24.
4359	=
4360	5 BEHOLD; as No. 23, 17, &c. But these two letters may
4361	possibly belong one to the former and one to the following word.
4362	It is DECREED, as No. 21,8, &e.
4363	7 THe, as No. 28, 17, &c.
4364	8 CRown; being a human head, but too small to show the orna-
4365	ments upon it.
4366	9 UPON; as No. 30, 40.
4367	10 The SACRED STATUE; as No. 29, 25.
4368	11 THAt; as No. 29,38, &c.
4369	12 NoT FrOM; or, according to the Greek, Not less than. See
4370	No. 19, 25, Nothing. The M may be the preposition.
4371	13 The RELIGIOUS CEREMONIES; as No. 4, 7, and 19, 1.
4372	14 DECREED Or APPOINTED; as No. 31,6; and preceded by R,
4373	the auxiliary verb of action, as No. 21, 32.
4374	15 THE crown; being the two words No. 31,7, and 8; and in
4375	each case without the final vowel. The artist shortens his words
4376	when they occur a second time.
4377	16 Of the Sraturs, meaning probably the little portable statues,
4378	each within a small shrine or temple, about 18 inches high; R,P,
4379	followed by T,S, the feminine termination of a woman's name, and
4380	then by D.S. of the statue; epne, the sanctuary of a temple.
4381	17 OF; as No. 28, 41, &c.
4382	18 HER MOTHER. The vulture, the syllable MAU, is often used
4383	with this meaning, either with or without a final I for the article.
4384	Our final S is the pronoun Her.
p. 154
4385	106 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 31.
4386	19 The QUrEN, being the bawk with the feminine article, and thus
4387	the feminine of the word Pharaoh. See the use of the hawk in
4388	No. 3, 18, His majesty. Thus, though in the Greek, mother and
4389	infant daughter have the same title, they are very different in the
4390	Hieroglyphics.
4391	20 BERENICE; as No. 27, 20, &c.
4392	21 Itis to be PLacED. This is the word which we have repeatedly
4393	rendered Kept, Held, or Celebrated, as of a festival. See No.
4394	19, 33, where, as here, it is preceded by the auxiliary verb of
4395	action.
4396	22 CONSPICUOUsIX; as No. 20, 26, &e.
4397	23 WITH; the preposition M, as No. 29, 38, &c.; but of the form
4398	used in No. 29, 39.
4399	24 EARS OF CORN; SH, M,S, followed by the D.S.; DEReC, an
4400	ear of corn.
4401	25 Two; S,N, with two dots, as the D.S.; CNas, two. The
4402	form of the S' is unusual; compare it with that in No. 1, 29.
4403	26 AN AsP; the figure of the animal, preceded by the indefinite
4404	article.
4405	27 On THE BAck; CH, I, with S,N, for the plural; KOT, to turn
4406	round.
4407	28 A SCEPTRE; the figure preceded by the indefinite article.
4408	29 OF; as No. 30, 40, &c.
4409	30 PAPYRUS FLOWERS. The first letter, SH, represents these
4410	plants; it is followed by I, and then by the D.S.
4411	31 Perhaps TO BE HELD UP; M, the prefix of the infinitive mood;
4412	K, Kel, to place, and the D.S. of a man holding up. The value
4413	of the final S does not appear. The Greek has To be of the same
4414	height; and that thought seems to be intended by the man's
4415	action.
4416	32 The PAPYRUS PLANT; as No. 31, 30, but written with fewer
4417	letters.
4418	33 The cRown; as No. 31,8.
4419	34 The Asp; as No. 31, 26.
4420	35 THE SAME; as 29,28, &c.
4421	36 LIKE; as No. 27, 6, and 16, 40.
p. 155
4422	LINE 31.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 107
4423	37 What is ACCUsTOMED or customary; literally, Heard; SOT, M;
4424	CWTEll, to hear. See No. 4, 17, for the force of the first
4425	character.
4426	38 In the TWO HANDs; represented pietorially.
4427	39 Of the GonDEssIs; as No. 29, 27, but in the plural, and
4428	without the D.S.
4429	40 The TAIL; S,T; CHT, a tail; preceded by the indefiuite
4430	article, and followed by the D.S.
4431	41 OF; as No. 31,9, &c.
4432	42 The Asp; as No. 31, 34.
4433	43 THE SAME; as 31,35, but with a different T.
4434	44 IWISTED; EM, N,N; perhaps from eeoseees, anything
4435	twisted; and followed by the D.S. of the asp's tail.
4436	45 On the ScEPTRE; as No. 31, 28.
4437	Line 32.
4438	1 THAT; the pronoun following its suhstantive; as No. 31, 11, &c.
4439	2 Br WricH; as No. 30, 31, and 32.
4440	3 ARRANguMeNT, in the plural, which is marked by S,M, in place
4441	of the more usual S,N. See No. 18, 12, where we have the same
4442	plural termination. But it is very possible that the M may be
4443	part of the following preposition in which case the final Nis
4444	here wanting, or the M may be said to supply the sound wanted
4445	for both words at the sane time; as they were written by the ear,
4446	and not spelt grammatically. See No. 33, 7, and 8, for the
4447	similar beginning of a sentence.
4448	4 IN; N, as No. 28, 25; unless it be M,N, as at No. 7,28. Here
4449	it forms a compound preposition, with the next word.
4450	5 WITHIN; S,H,N; cagors. This and the former word
4451	together make one compound preposition, meaning Between;
4452	and they may be compared to No. 7,28, a similar compound
4453	preposition. The flower is an O at No. 2, 22, and is so placed
4454	that it might be taken for the vowel in this word. But it is
4455	necessary to take it as the substantive following it.
4456	6 The EARS OF CORN; as No. 31,24, but the D.S. only, without
4457	the spelt word. Here the Greek has The crown; but the two
4458	have the same meaning, as the ears of corn were to be placed
4459	upon the statue as its crown.
p. 156
4460	108 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 32.
4461	7 THat, or rather Trose, as its noun is in the plural. See
4462	No. 32, 1. This pronoun following its substantive proves that
4463	the flower is a word by itself, as described, and not the letter O,
4464	part of the foregoing preposition, No. 32, 5.
4465	8 May be sHown. On the Rosetta Stone we have these three
4466	characters in one, witk the same meaning. Thesitting man holds
4467	out the tablet with his outstretched arnı. In that case the character
4468	is strictly pictorial. Here it is less so.
4469	9 THe; as No. 31,7, &c.
4470	10 NaME; being the oval witbin which the queen's name is
4471	written; as No. 28, 18, &c.
4472	I1 OF; as No. 30, 23, &c.
4473	12 BERENICb; as No. 31,20, &c.
4474	13 THE; as No. 32, 9, &c.
4475	14 CHARACTERS, Or CONSPICUOUS MARKS, written, as it would seem,
4476	pictorially, by means of a peculiar characler, then the plural sign,
4477	and then the word Conspicuous. The letter T'may be the feminine
4478	article.
4479	15 Or; as No. 30, 2, &c.
4480	16 The ScrIBEs; as No. 18, 22, though at No. 37, 10, it means
4481	letters.
4482	17 Of, as No. 18, 23, &c.
4483	18 HEAVENLY LIFE; as No. 18, 24.
4484	19 AND. In some cases it seems doubtful whether these letters,
4485	A,O, are the article or the conjunction; but bere it scems clear,
4486	as at No. 2, 3.
4487	20 DURING THE CELEBRATION. The letters here are in an irregular
4488	order; but on comparison with the Greek, we cannot be wrong iu
4489	recognizing 1,0,1, to keep oi celebrate, as No. 17, 21, and 32, 35,
4490	&c.; and then the R,R, may be EZPHI, upon, as No. 15, 10, sc.
4491	21 Of the Daxs; as No. 22, 10, but in the plural.
4492	22,23. The ceremony called in the Greck THE KIKELLIs, possibly
4493	the festival already described in Lines 51 and 52 of the Greek, as
4494	the same month is the time for each. The first letters are K,A,
4495	which correspond with the word Kikellia.
p. 157
4496	LINE 32.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 109
4497	24 IN; as No. 28, 15, &e.
4498	25 The month of CHEAC; as No. 26,2.
4499	26 IN ADDITION IO; as No. 15, 3, and 28, 44.
4500	27 The WATER PROCESSION; as No. 28, 29.
4501	28 Of OsIRIs; as No. 25,5.
4502	29 It shall be GRANTED; as No. 9,20. This must be distinguished
4503	from No. 29, 43, where the hand does not hold the pyramid.
4504	30 UNro; A,N; the preposition s, which is more usually, in
4505	this inscription, written without the vowel, as No. 31, 29, &e.
4506	31 The women; as No. 31,3.
4507	32 The wives, as No. 4, 35. The Greek here has mapfevos, a word
4508	which in the Hellenistic dialect of Alexandria, was not limited to
4509	unmarried maidens, but meant young women.
4510	33 OF, as No. 32, 17, &c.
4511	34 The PRIEsTs; as No. 30,8, &e.
4512	35 TO PREPABE; as No. 17, 21, and 32, 20, where we translate it,
4513	to celebrate.
4514	36 ANoTHEr; K,I,T; KET, as No. 16,27, &e. The second T may
4515	be the feminine article, showing that the first T' is part of the word.
4516	37 STATUE; as No. 31, 16.
4517	38 OF; as No. 31,41, &c.
4518	39 BERENICE; as No. 31, 20, &c.
4519	40 CHIEF; E,T; perhaps EET, may mean Great, though it is used
4520	for Pregnant. Our hieroglyphical word is often met with, and
4521	always with this meaning. Voc. 1372.
4522	41 Of WOMEN; as No. 32, 31.
4523	42 PERFORMING, CELEBRATING; as No. 32, 35, with S,N, for the
4524	plura.
4525	43 SACRIFICES; as No. 26, 10.
4526	44 AND; as No. 30,20, c.
4527	45 OrHer things; as No. 20, 20, ac.
4528	Line 33.
4529	1 SHALL BE CELEBRATED; as No. 28, 45, which has the prefix of
4530	the infinitive mood, while here we have S, the prefix of the future
4531	tense. No. 20, 22, is in the same tense.
4532	2 UPON; N,I,M; sEel; as No. 2, 10, and 23, 11.
p. 158
4533	110 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, [LINE 33.
4534	3 The Dars; as No. 32, 21.
4535	4 Of; as No. 32,33, &c.
4536	5 AssENBLy; as No. 28,27, &c.
4537	6 THAT; as No. 32, I, &c.
4538	=
4539	7 BECAUSE OF THIS, BY THIS; as No. 32, 2, &c.
4540	8 It is DECREED; as No. 32, 3; and as 9,14, but we bave
4541	another letter in addition.
4542	9 BEHOLD; as No. 19, 8, &c.
4543	10 FoR; E,M, instead of M, the more usual preposition, as No.
4544	29, 38, &c.
4545	11 OTHeR; as No. 20, 20, but preceded by a IK, which may be for
4546	KET, other, and thus give to the word a reduplicate form.
4547	12 WomeN; as No. 32, 31, &c.
4548	13 Who ARE WILLINg; EL, R,I; probably El, to be, and pasr,
4549	willing. The M may be for N, as is not unusual.
4550	14 Shall CELEBRATE; as No. 33, 1.
4551	15 THEIR OWN; N,OU,OU; roros; as No. 11, 1.
4552	16 UNTo; as No. 29, 1, &c.
4553	17 GoDDEsS; as No. 29, 27.
4554	18 THAT SAME; the adjective to the foregoing substantive; as
4555	No. 29, 28, &c.
4556	19 Hymns; M, perhaps for Eles, to remember, preceded by R, the
4557	verb of action, and followed by S,N, for the plural. See No. 3,
4558	19, and 28, 43, for this rord to celebrate.
4559	20 SING. The man in the act of praying is followed by the letters
4560	O,I, which must make some such word as OrpoT, to sing. See
4561	No. 34, 8, where this is confirmed.
4562	21 To the GODDEsS; as No. 33, 17.
4563	22 THAT SAME; as No. 33, 18.
4564	23 BEHOLD; as No. 33, 9.
4565	24 UNDER; the preposition as No. 32, 30; which in other places
4566	is written without the vowel.
4567	25 The PRIESTESSES. This is the word SBT, No. 1, 12, in the
4568	feminine and with the D.S. They are therefore priestesses of the
4569	very first rank, as we shall be told at No. 33, 43.
p. 159
4570	LINE 83.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 111
4571	26 CHOsEN; as No. 30, 9.
4572	27 Another class of PrIEsts, or, aceording to the Greek, Priestesses;
4573	possibly Servants of the gods, may be the literal rendering. The
4574	first letter is perhaps a B, and may represent BWK, a servant. As
4575	the batchet, God, is pronounced NOU, the whole word may"be
4576	Bockanou, the name of one of the four orders of priests, and
4577	written at length in Egypt. Inscript. pl. 32. Here these servants
4578	are women.
4579	: 28 Who CARRy; as No. 30, 24, &c.
4580	29 The prefix of the case, which, when the case is the accusative, we
4581	do not express in English; but we treat it as a preposition when
4582	it represents any other case.
4583	30 The THINGS THAT ARE CARRIED; as No. 33, 28; in the Greek,
4584	the necessaries.
4585	31 Or; as No. 33,4, &e.
4586	32 The GoDs; as No. 30, 14, &ic.
4587	33 To Whom THEY ARE APPOINTED; Of DECREED; as No. 32,
4588	3, Scc.
4589	34 For; as No. 33, 29, &e.
4590	35 The PRIESTLY WOMEN; being the word Priest, as No. 30,8,
4591	followed by the D.S. of a woman, and a double plural termination,
4592	=
4593	36 Is MADE; A,R, EpE; being the auxiliary prefix to the verb
4594	No. 33, 39, from which it is separated by the interjection and
4595	the nominative. See No. 25, 29, and 22, 6, in both which cases
4596	it is separated from its chief word.
4597	37 BEHOLD; as No. 33,9.
4598	38 THE EARLY CORN, the unripe seed, is required by the Greek.
4599	39 SPRUNG UP; R,T,E; PHT. This is the literal meaning of
4600	the word which we have so often rendered as Added; No. 32.
4601	26, &c.
4602	40 • MADE itself conspIcuous; the sitting figure Conspicuous,
4603	as No. 31, 22, &e. preceded by R,B,Ru, of whieh R may be
4604	the auxiliary verb to make, and R,R, the preposition EZPHS, as
4605	No. 15, 10, &c.
4606	41 EARS OF COrN; as No. 31, 24, but with a different D.S.
p. 160
4607	112 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 33.
4608	42 Shall BRING; A,N; EINE, to bring. See No. 26, 32.
4609	43 The PRIESTESSEs; as No. 33, 25.
4610	44 OF THE FIEST RANK; as No. 28, 35, &c., preceded by the
4611	indefinite article.
4612	Line 34.
4613	. 1 GIva; as No. 32, 29, where it was preceded by the auxiliary
4614	verb.
4615	2 UNTO; as No. 32, 11, &c.
4616	3 The Sratur; as No. 31, 10, but witbout tbe D.S., which
4617	becomes less necessary when the word has been already written.
4618	4 OF; as No. 31, 29, &c.
4619	5 GODDEss; as No, 33, 17.
4620	6 THe SAME; as No. 33, 18, &e.
4621	7 Songs; H,0,S; &WC; and again at No. 34, 36.
4622	8 SING; as No. 33, 20, though there the man is using his hands,
4623	or praying, and here he points to his mouth. This figure is po,
4624	a mouth, and with the O,T, which follow, and the addition of an
4625	article at the beginning, becomes OrpOT, to sing. The article O3
4626	was probably often in this way sounded when not written; as we
4627	have numerous instances in kings' names of the letters RA, tbe
4628	sun, being pronounced Phra, by the addition of the definite article.
4629	9 UNTO; as No. 34, 2, &Te.
4630	10 HER; P,E; ME, which in Coptie is masculine, He, Him.
4631	No. 30,17, where this word is also in the objective case.
4632	I1 The D.S., a sitting figure, without the head-dress distinctive of
4633	a woman, but made feminine by the S which follows it.
4634	12 UPON, AI; as No. 32, 30.
4635	13 APPOINTED; T,O,S, TWIy. For the force of the S, sce
4636	No. 11, 40.
4637	14 TIMEs; probably the same character as the first in the word
4638	No. 29, 8, to which we have so often given that meaning.
4639	15 These songs; as No. 34, 7.
4640	16 The MEN and womEn shall SING; the man alone points to his
4641	mouth; but that may be enough to show that the women also are
4642	to sing.
4643	17 The MEN; P,D; nн, He, in the plural, because of the three
p. 161
4644	LINE 34.} EXPLANATION OF THD HIEROGLYPHICS. 113
4645	dots. See No. 2, 7, for the foree of the first letter, and No. 2, 10,
4646	for the force of the second.
4647	18 The wIves; as No. 32, 32, &e.
4648	19 InPlAces; M,A, eld, a place. The conjunction which follows,
4649	and separates this word from a similar word, namely, assemblies,
4650	proves its meaning. See No. 35, 4.
4651	20 AND; as No. 20,19, &ic.
4652	21 AssEMBLIes; as No. 22, 25, &c.
4653	22 CARRYINGS OUT; as No. 33, 30, Stc.
4654	23 Of; as No. 33, 31.
4655	24 The GoDs; as No. 33, 32.
4656	25 SoNGs, or WOrDS; M,S; with D.S. of a man in the act of
4657	prayer; perhaps the S may be çyW to speak, with M, the prefix
4658	of the case.
4659	26 FROMAMONG, Or FROM THE BOrrOM. See No. 17, 17, where it
4660	is rendered At first. It is the preposition, or adverb, ca Фрня,
4661	and partakes of its very various meanings. The R,R is for H,R,
4662	as at No. 20, 24, &c.
4663	27 WHIcH; N,T,T,E; NET; the pronoun to the foregoing word
4664	Songs.
4665	28 A MAN; represented pictorially.
4666	29 OF; as No. 34, 23, &c.
4667	30 HEAVENX LIFE; as No. 32, 18, &c.
4668	31 Sball GIVE; as No. 34, 1, &c.
4669	32 UNTO; as No. 34,2, dc.
4670	33 The CHIEF; M,R; epE; as No. 2, 17, where it is preceded
4671	by the indefinite article. In other and earlier inscriptions these
4672	two letters are sometimes followed by a K; and then the word
4673	resembles the Hebrew 73a. See Vuc. 680.
4674	34 LEARNED MAN; S,B,E; CBW.
4675	35 OF; as No. 34, 23, &c.
4676	36 The sINGERs; as No. 34, 15, and 16.
4677	37 TO WRITE; see Scribe, No. 36, 29.
4678	38 A coPY; H,T,T; from 2E, like, as No. 15, 4. See No. 31,36.
4679	39 THE; as No. 31,7, &c.
4680	40 Books; as No. 37, 12. Voc. 335.
4681	I
p. 162
4682	114 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 35.
4683	41 OF; as No. 31, 29, &c.
4684	42 HLAVENIY LIFE; as No. 34, 30.
4685	=
4686	43 BECAUSE OF THIS; as No. 33, 7, &c.
4687	44 When are DISTRIBUTED; A,T,O,T; perhaps from TOs, to dis-
4688	tribute, with E, the prefix of the verb's mood; or perhaps
4689	T8sWT to place, a verb formed of THI, to give, and ZIWT,
4690	ироn.
4691	45 DEDICATED LOAves. The first character, O, is a very frequent
4692	abridgment of OYOTEB, No. 25, 1; the second is a loaf
4693	represented pietorially, as No. 35, 38.
4694	46 UNTO; as No. 34, 9, &c.
4695	47 The PRIEsTs; as No. 32, 34, &e.
4696	48 FRoM; as No. 33, 34, &c.
4697	49 THE; as No. 28, 8, &c.
4698	50 TEMPLes; as No. 29, 4, &c.
4699	51 Of the FAMIIY; as No. 26, 20.
4700	5.2 Those ALREADY; as No. 14, 8; and 16, 21, where it is in the
4701	singular, and as No. 14, 20, when it is in the plural, as here.
4702	Line 35.
4703	1 Or; the preposition si, as No. 32, 30; or it may be EISrE, 1s
4704	brought, as No. 33, 42.
4705	2 The SET, or CHIEF PRIESI, as No. 8, 24; and distinguished as
4706	there by his peculiar crown. But here the Greek has "When
4707	they are brought out to the multitude." The scribe seems to have
4708	been confused between this word for Priest, and cyw, a multitude.
4709	The two meanings, which the last word will bear, leave us in the
4710	difficulty.
4711	3 Of the TEMPLE; as No. 25,38; but here preceded by the article.
4712	4 Ofa rlace; E,M,I, or M,E,I; for the vowel, written across the
4713	M may be read in either place; eeal, a place, preceded by the
4714	article. See No. 34, 19.
4715	5 There shall be DISTRIBUTED; as No. 34, 44.
4716	6 PRESENCE; N,R; saZPE, a preposition composed of sra,
4717	belonging to, and &pa, the face. It is used as the adjective to
4718	the following word Loaves; and it thus describes them as brought
p. 163
4719	LINE 35.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 115
4720	into the temple into the presence of the statue. It is the counter-
4721	part of the Hebrew "1t3, unto the face, from which the bread of
4722	the temple was called SuD 5n3, presence-bread. See No. 35, 23;
4723	but see-also No. 14, 35, where these letters are a verbal prefix.
4724	The doubt hetween the two meanings is removed by the D.S.
4725	7 LoAvEs; represented pictorially, as at No. 36, 10, where this
4726	character is used as the D.S. after the word spelt by letters.
4727	8 UNTO; as No. 34, 32, &c,
4728	9 The DaUGHTErs; M,S,O, plural; from reEc, born. See No.
4729	13, 29, Birth, also No. 37, 44, Children. The O is the plural
4730	termination, and is very unnecessarily followed by the three dots.
4731	10 Of the cHIers; as No. 32, 40. This is usually, perhaps
4732	always, a feminine title.
4733	Il Of; as No. 31, 23, &c.
4734	12 The PRIESTs; as No. 34,47, &c.
4735	13 SINCE; as No. 24, 16, and 14, 25.
4736	14 The DaY; as No. 33,3, &c.
4737	When THEY WERE BORN; as No. 35,9.
4738	16 Was REMEMBERED, OF CELEBBATED; as No. 29, 19. Thus it
4739	would seem that their right to food was not counted from their
4740	birthday, but fiom some coremonial festival which soon followed
4741	it, like the day of baptism among Christians.
4742	17 FRON; as No. 34, 48, &c.
4743	18 THE; as No. 34, 49, &c.
4744	19 SACRED DEDICATED LOAVES; being composed of the words God,
4745	No. 33, 32; and Dedicated loaves, No. 34, 45. In the copy of
4746	the Decree at Paris, we find bere, instead of the two words, Dedicated
4747	Loaves, the word No. 14,34, in the plural, Appointed things.
4748	20 Or; as No. 35, 11, &c.
4749	21 The gods; as No. 33, 32, &c. In the Paris copy this word is
4750	written with three hatchets, and without the three dots.
4751	22 Our oF; as No. 25, 44. In the Paris copy we have the owl
4752	instead of this eharacter.
4753	23 THE PRESENCE-LOAVIS; as No, 35, 6, and 7. They are called
4754	in the Greek the sacred revenue.
4755	24 Marked with a PATTERN. This meaning we learn from
4756	12
p. 164
4757	116 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 35.
4758	No. 36, 6. The cross may be the D.S. of the pattern on each loaf
4759	or cake. The pricked cakes, so often mentioned in the Hebrew
4760	Law, as in Leviticus vii., 12, do not seem to have been marked with
4761	any pattern, but simply pricked, to make them less heavy, because
4762	they were not made with leaven. These Egyptian loaves may be
4763	compared ratber to the Cbristian crossed-buns eaten on Good
4764	Friday.
4765	25 ADJUDGED; as No. 16, 47, and 22, 16.
4766	26 Bx; as No. 32, 30.
4767	27 The PrIESTs; as No. 35, 12, &c.
4768	28 The SENATORs; as No. 16, 2.
4769	29 IN; as No. 30, 21, &c.
4770	30 The SANCTUARy, or cell of the temple; as No. 28, 31, and
4771	16,32.
4772	31 Of the Iwo regIons, of Upper and Lower Egypt; being the
4773	word Land, followed by the dual sign.
4774	32 UPON; as No, 29, 7, &c.
4775	33 The TImEs; as No. 29, 8; meaning, as it would seem, hence-
4776	forth.
4777	34 LIKE OX AGREBABLY IO; as No. 31, 36, and 27, 6.
4778	35 The mouth, meaning the COMMAND; R,D; PO, the mouth.
4779	36 Or; as No. 34, 32, &c.
4780	37 The PRIEsTs of the DEDICATED LOAVES; though there is nothing
4781	to distinguish this word from No. 35, 19, where the loaves were
4782	meant. In the Greek we have Priests of the revenue.
4783	38 The Loaves; A,K; &lk, bread, followed by the D.S. and the
4784	three dots. Without the D.S. it could not be distinguished from
4785	the word Dedication.
4786	39 Which ARL GIVEN; as No. 9, 20; but distinct from No. 29, 43.
4787	Line 36.
4788	1 UNTO; as No. 35, 36, &c.
4789	2 The wIves; as No. 34, 18, with the addition of the D.S.
4790	3 OF; as No. 35, 11, &c.
4791	4 The PRIESTs; as No. 35, 27, &c.
4792	5 Shall be MARKED; as No. 28,24, &c., as it would seenı, though
4793	the order of the last two letters is reversed. There and elsewhere
4794	it is rendered to celebrate, as of a festival.
p. 165
4795	LINE 36 ] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS, 117
4796	6 With a PATTERN; according to the Greek. See No. 35, 24, and
4797	22,15, where the Greek does not help us.
4798	7 To be IMPRESSED; M,K,F; perhaps from KW, to put on, preceded
4799	by M, the sign of the infinitive mood, and followed by F, for the
4800	third person singular. See No. 36, 13, for a word of the same
4801	grammatical form.
4802	8 UPoN the LOA!'; Upon, as No. 36, 1, &c.; Loaf, as No. 35, 38.
4803	9 PUT THEREON; as No. 30, 39, where we have remarked that
4804	this word is often of no use but to add emphasis.
4805	10 The LOAVEs; as No. 35, 38, where the letters have the same
4806	force, though different in form.
4807	11 Of; as No. 30, 40, &e.
4808	12 BERENICE; as No. 32, 39, &e.
4809	13 IO BE NAMED; see No. 23, 44. This is a word of the same
4810	form as No. 36, 7, beginning with the sign of the infinitive, and
4811	ending with that of the third person singular.
4812	14 The LEARNED PROPHET; S,B,E,O; CBW, learned, while the
4813	figure, pointing to his mouth, tells us that he is a speaker.
4814	15 THAT SAME; as No. 32, 1.
4815	16 Of; as No. 30,31, &e.
4816	17 The PLACE; as No. 35, 4.
4817	18 Anotber D.S. of this prophet.
4818	19 The scRIBe; as No. 32, 16, &e.
4819	20 CONSECRATED; O,T,F; being the same as O,1,P, No. 25, 1.
4820	WTB, to dedicate. This is very possibly the original, though
4821	less usual, way of writing the word; as it may be a past participle
4822	of OrOT, to separate.
4823	21 Of the sENAToRs; as No. 35, 28.
4824	22 Or; as No. 25, 44, &c., meaning the representatives of, as we
4825	see there had been only twenty, and were for the future to be
4826	only tweuty-five senators to represent the whole priesthood of the
4827	kingdom.
4828	23 Tbe PRIESTS OF THE TEMPLES. The character for temples is
4829	here used as an adjective descriptive of the man that follows.
4830	24 ALI; as No. 18, 8.
p. 166
4831	118 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. [LINE 36.
4832	25 The CHIEr; as No. 34,33.
4833	26 Of the TEMPLE-XARD; as No. 29, 4, &c. But here used in
4834	opposition to No. 36, 23, and therefore the general word Temple is
4835	unsuitable. It is an adjective to the figure of a man that follows,
4836	as No. 36, 23.
4837	27 The prIests; being the figure of a man distinguished by the
4838	foregoing adjective. The distinetion between the Temples of No.
4839	36,23, and those of No. 36, 26, is not explained. We can observe,
4840	however, that the first represents a standing building, and the
4841	other only a ground plan, perhaps a court-yard, as distinguished
4842	from the building that stood within it. In this way the upper and
4843	lower ranks of priests seem to be distinguished.
4844	28 AND; as No. 34, 20, &e.
4845	29 The scRIBes; as No. 32, 16; but here followed by the D.S. of
4846	a man.
4847	30 OF; as No. 36,3, &c.
4848	31 The TEMPLes; here described as sacred buildings; as No.
4849	35, 3. In the copy of the Deeree at Paris this word is slightly
4850	enlarged, being written as No. 26, 23.
4851	32 Shall CARVE; O, CH,T; followed by the D.S. of a chisel and
4852	a slab of stone; from EKUT a builder. See No. 12, 32, Lord
4853	of the builders.
4854	33 THe; as No. 31, 7, &e.
4855	34 INSCRIPTION; SH, A,A,T; from CØHT, a writing. See
4856	No. 21, 23, for the foree of the first letter.
4857	Line 37.
4858	1 On a TABLET; represented pietorially, as on the Rosetta Stone.
4859	2 OF; as No. 31,4, &c.
4860	STONE; A,N,R; with D.S.; wrs, stone. The foree of the R
4861	is not evident; it might possibly make the word into Hewn stone,
4862	from spi to make.
4863	5 CoPPER; but how to be read is uneertain ; R ,, D,P,O,E, plural.
4864	The latter letters may perhaps represent ZaE00s, bright; as
4865	the plural sign has the force of OU.
4866	6 IN; as No. 34, 48, &e.
4867	7 LLITERS; as No. 36,29, where it is part of the word Scribe.
p. 167
4868	LINE 37.] EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. 119
4869	8 OF; as No. 36, 30, &e.
4870	9 HEAVENLY LIFE; as No. 34, 30, &c. These "letters of heavenly
4871	life " are the Hieroglyphics.
4872	10 LETTERS; as No. 37,7, &c.
4873	11 For; as No. 35, 36, &c.
4874	12 Books; as No. 34, 40. These "letters for books" are the
4875	enchorial, or common running hand, seen upon the papyrus-rolls.
4876	This portion of the inscription was never executed on this tablet,
4877	whieh has only two out of the three portions. On the tablet at
4878	Paris all three inscriptions were duly carved.
4879	13 LETTERS; as No. 37, I0.
4880	14 For; as No. 37, 11, &ie.
4881	15 The Greeks; or possibly for Lower Egypt; as that plant is
4882	sometimes typical of that distriet.
4883	16 The auxiliary verb to the coming word, from OpE, to make; as
4884	No. 29, 43. The letters are not in the order of the Coptie word.
4885	This must be distinguished from No. 35, 39, where the hand
4886	holds a pyramid.
4887	17 To be sET uP, as in the Rosetta Stone. See also No. 29, 24,
4888	for the first character.
4889	18 In a CONsPICUOUs; according to the Greek, which fixes the
4890	meaning of this character for the otber parts of this inseription.
4891	19 PLACE; the M used for the longer word of No. 35, 4, and
4892	36,17 ; and followed by a D.S.
4893	20 Of; as No. 36, 30, &e.
4894	21 MEN and WoMeN; as No. 22,43, &c.
4895	22 IN; as No. 37,6, &c.
4896	23 The TeMPles; as No. 34,50. Ihis, we see, is the word in its
4897	widest sense, including temples of the very various kinds distin-
4898	guished by the other names herein used.
4899	24 Of the FIRST BANK; as No. 25,13.
4900	25 TEMPLes; as No. 37, 23, and No. 28, 34, the change in the
4901	letter M making no difference in the word.
4902	26 Of the SECOND RANK; distinguished by the dual sigu.
4903	27 TEMPLES; as No. 37, 23, &c.
4904	28 Of the THIRD RANK; distinguished by the three dots.
p. 168
4905	120 EXPLANATION OF THE HIEROGLYPHICS. LLINE 37.
4906	29 So tbat there may be GIVEN; as No. 35, 39, but preceded by
4907	an B, wbich may be the preposition.
4908	30 Perhaps, a sIGHT, if we may consider the eye as the D.S. of
4909	the foregoing word.
4910	31 THl; as No. 36, 33; perhaps Of it.
4911	32 ALL; N,E,B; NIBI; as No. 30, 34.
4912	33 MEN and WoMen; as No. 30, 35, and followed by the word
4913	All, in a shorter form than No. 30, 36.
4914	34 HOW IO PREPARE; as No. 5, 11, &e., and preceded by M, the
4915	sign of the infinitive mood.
4916	35 Bx; as we must make the sentence conform to the.Greek; but
4917	it would seem, from the order of the words, more like For.
4918	36 The PRIESTS; as No. 30,8, &c.
4919	37 OF; as No. 36, 30, Stc.
4920	38 The TEMPLEs; as No. 37, 23, &Te.
4921	39 Of the cITIEs; as No. 5, 33,
4922	40 Of EGYPT; as No. 5, 34.
4923	41 FoR; as No. 31,29, &c.
4924	42 The GODS EUERGETa; as No. 1, 3l, &e.
4925	43 AND; as No. 36, 28, &e.
4926	44 Their cHILDren, both male and female, as shown by the D.S.
4927	From M,S, born; see No. 35, 9, &te.
4928	45 BEHOLD; as No. 33, 9, &c.; but with a different A.
4929	46 The RELIGIOUS CEREMONIES; as No. 19, 1, and 28, 45.
4930	47 FoR; as No. 37, 14, &c.
4931	48 The DoIngs; as No. 4, 38, and 17,33.
4932	Woodfäll and Kindex, Printere, Milford'Iane, Strand, London, W.c
p. 169
p. 170
p. 171
p. 172

Provenance

title: Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870) — OCR (Apple Vision)
dialect: none
source: corpus/incoming/e-2/sharpe-canopus-1870/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf, 172 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md
licence: public domain in Canada (author died ≤ 1971, verified; LICENCES.md §7) — US position (recorded, does not gate the class; PD-CA 2026-09-26): PD-US (published ≤1930)
share: public
attribution: Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Sharpe d.1881: PDF Author field "Sharpe, Samuel, 1799-1881, ed. and tr" of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29); title page pdf p. 5 ("… by Samuel Sharpe … London: John Russell Smith … 1870") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume sharpe-canopus-1870)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.
OCR: Apple Vision VNRecognizeTextRequest rev 3, accurate, language correction off, via tools/vision_ocr/vision_ocr (NC-4/NC-9); macOS Version 26.6.2 (Build 25G83); render pdftoppm 300 dpi gray; 2 text column(s) read separately (page 1; per page in the staged records); NOT D2: no CER against hand-read GT for this volume — the only figure is agreement with the scanner's own text layer (corpus/incoming/e-2/cer.tsv), not accuracy (CLAUDE.md §1.3)
file: Ancient Egyptian/Demotic texts and the trilingual decrees/Sharpe, The Decree of Canopus in Hieroglyphics and Greek (1870).vision-ocr.L0.txt

Cite as:

Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870) — OCR (Apple Vision). corpus/incoming/e-2/sharpe-canopus-1870/ — Apple Vision OCR (tools/e2_ocr.py, worker E-2, 2026-09-29) of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf, 172 PDF pages; provenance and verification in corpus/incoming/e-2/STAGING.md. Layers as published by the Kemetic project (Yousef Hanna), 2026: Coptic · Cairene · Kemetic, /doc/ancient-egyptian/demotic-texts-and-the-trilingual-decrees/sharpe-the-decree-of-canopus-in-hieroglyphics-and-greek-1870.vision-ocr/. Sharpe – The Decree of Canopus, in Hieroglyphics and Greek, with translations and an explanation of the hieroglyphical characters (London: John Russell Smith, 1870); public domain in Canada (death year verified: Sharpe d.1881: PDF Author field "Sharpe, Samuel, 1799-1881, ed. and tr" of corpus/incoming/demotic-texts/sharpe_decree-of-canopus_1870.pdf (pdfinfo, read 2026-09-29); title page pdf p. 5 ("… by Samuel Sharpe … London: John Russell Smith … 1870") · note (PROPOSED-scan_copyright-E-2.csv): (E-2 volume sharpe-canopus-1870)); OCR text by the Kemetic project, Yousef Hanna 2026.

What the layers are

L0 witness
The text as its witness or edition has it, original spelling; its dialect is a description and is never standardized.

L0.5 transliteration
For Egyptian texts: the transliteration with the editors' marks turned into the symbols ° * < > _ ^ (ruled 2026-09-10). For papyri: the edition's Leiden marks as the same symbols, and the editors' readings beside the scribe's as ‹scribe→editors› (ruled PAP-3).

L1 Cairene
Standardized Greco-Bohairic spelling and grammar, generated by code from the layer above under the rulings of the project.

L2 Kemetic
The Kemetic alphabet, generated by code from L1.

English
Quoted translations where they exist, credited; otherwise model drafts, marked as drafts.

Source and licence

The text

Provenance

L0 witness (OCR)

What the layers are